LNC-M600 Leading Numerical Controller Maintenance Manual

LNC-M600 

Maintenance Manual 

2008/1 Ver:V04.00.001(4408210020) 

Leading Numerical Controller 

LNC Technology Co., Ltd.


Table of Contents 


1 SPECIFICATION.......................................................................................1 

1.1 NORMAL SPECIFICATION & OPTION SPECIFICATION................................................1 

1.2 LNC 600 STANDARD CONTROLLER & LNC 600 COMPACT CONTROLLER ................2 

1.2.1 LNC600 Standard Controller..................................................................2 

1.2.2 LNC600 Compact Controller..................................................................2 

1.2.3 Specifications Table of LNC 600............................................................2 

2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE...................................................................4 

2.1 LNC-M600 INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION...............................................................4 

2.1.1 [O.S UTILITY]........................................................................................4 

2.1.2 [LNC_M600 INSTALL DISK]..................................................................5 

2.1.3 Font Disk...............................................................................................7 

2.2 SYSTEM UPDATE .................................................................................................8 

2.3 SYSTEM DIRECTION DESCRIPTION......................................................................11 

2.3.1 [OS.UTILTIY] Results..........................................................................11 

2.3.2 [LNC_M600 INSTALL DISK] Results...................................................11 

3 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE................................................................12 

3.1 POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................................12 

3.2 LNC600 STANDARE CONTROLLER.....................................................................12 

3.2.1 Standard..............................................................................................12 

3.2.2 Cabinet Equipment..............................................................................12 

3.2.3 Optional...............................................................................................12 

3.2.4 PCC1620 Motion Control Card Hardware Specification.......................12 

3.2.5 I/O Card Specfication...........................................................................13 

3.2.6 Controller Outlook Chart......................................................................14 

3.2.7 Controller Lights Definition...................................................................15 

3.2.8 System Connection Chart....................................................................16 

3.3 LNC 600 COMPACT CONTROLLER .....................................................................18 

3.3.1 Standard..............................................................................................18 

3.3.2 Cabinet Equipment..............................................................................18 

3.3.3 Optional...............................................................................................18 

3.3.4 PCC1840 Motion Control Board Hardware Specification.....................18 

LNC Technology Co., Ltd. 

I



3.3.5 I/O Specification...................................................................................18 

3.3.6 Controller Outlook Chart......................................................................19 

3.3.7 Hardware Description..........................................................................20 

3.3.8 Basic Control System Connection Chart..............................................21 

3.4 HARDWARE MODULE DESCRIPTION ....................................................................25 

3.4.1 I/O Module...........................................................................................25 

3.4.2 I/O Card...............................................................................................27 

3.4.3 I/O card SIO 1520 definition................................................................28 



3.4.6 Transit Board (TRF1720) Module........................................................43 

3.4.7 Transit board(TRF2760) Module..........................................................59 

3.4.8 Operation panel module......................................................................68 

3.5 THE SELF PROTECTING......................................................................................75 

3.5.1 Twin CF card( be applicable to the Compact controller)......................75 

4 MLC MAINTENANCE -- C,S BITS AND REGISTER ..........................76 

4.1 C BITS DEFINITION............................................................................................76 

4.2 S BITS DEFINITION............................................................................................79 

4.3 REGISTER DEFINITION.......................................................................................82 

4.4 C BITS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................83 

4.5 S BITS DESCTIPTION.........................................................................................99 

4.6 REGISTER DESCTIPTION..................................................................................113 

4.7 MLC WINDOW FUNCTION................................................................................120 

4.8 MLC INITIAL SETTING DESCRIPTION(PLCIO.CFG).......................................124 

5 PARAMETER ........................................................................................127 

5.1 PARAMETER LIST ............................................................................................128 

5.2 SERVO PARAMETER ........................................................................................152 

5.3 MACHINE PARAMETER.....................................................................................171 

5.4 SPINDLE PARAMETER......................................................................................173 

5.5 MPG PARAMETER ..........................................................................................201 

5.6 COMPENSATION PARAMETER ...........................................................................203 

5.7 ZERO RETURN PARAMETER..............................................................................213 

5.8 OPERATION PARAMETER..................................................................................227 

6 SYSTEM ALARM AND WARNING.......................................................255 

II 




6.1 OP OPERATION RELATED ALARM.............................................................256 

6.2 OP OPERATION RELATED WARNING........................................................259 

6.3 INT INTERPRETATION RELATED ALARM..................................................260 

6.4 MOT MOTION RELATED ALARM................................................................268 

7 MACHINE ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................279 

7.1 MILLING RIGID TAPPING COMMANDING .............................................................279 

7.2 LASER COMPENSATION PROCEDURE ................................................................283 

7.3 DOUBLE BALL BAR MEASURE – BACKLASH OR CIRCULAR SPIKE.........................287 

8 DIMENSION...........................................................................................290 

8.1 LCD MODULE INSTALLATION POSITION .............................................................290 

8.2 MDI DIMENSION .............................................................................................291 

8.3 OPERATIONAL PANEL DIMENSION .....................................................................292 

8.4 PUSH-BUTTON OPERATIONAL PANEL DIMENSION ...............................................293 

8.5 MPG OPERATIONAL PANEL DIMENSION ............................................................294 

8.6 FDD、CD-ROM DIMENSION ..........................................................................295 

8.7 ELC-1000MA DIMENSION...............................................................................296 

8.8 ELC-2000 DIMENSION....................................................................................297 

8.9 STANDARD (IPC 586) DIMENSION ....................................................................298 

8.10 ELC_P100A POWER SUPPLY DIMENSION ........................................................299 

APPENDIX A: PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLE..........................300 

A1 PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT OF V COMMAND CONTROL METHOD................................300 

A2 PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT WHEN ENCODER IS INSTALLED BESIDES BALL SCREW........303 

A3 PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT WHEN USING LINEAR SCALE CONTROL METHOD...............306 

APPENDIX B: SERVO CONNECTION EXAMPLE....................................309 

B1 YASKAWA SERVO CONNECTION EXAMPLE...............................................................309 

B2 PANASONIC SERVO CONNECTION EXAMPLE............................................................315 

B3 MITSUBISHI SERVO EXAMPLE ................................................................................318 

B4 TOSHIBA CONVERTER.........................................................................................324 

APPENDIX C: ENABLING OP PROTECTION LOOP CONNECTION 

EXAMPLE....................................................................................................337 

APPENDIX D: 3 IN 1 MPG CONNECTION EXAMPLE..............................339 

APPENDIX E: RS232 CONNECTION DESCRIPTION...............................340 

LNC Technology Co., Ltd. 

III



APPENDIX F INTERNET SETTING DESCRIPTION..................................343 

IV 



SPECIFICATION 

1 SPECIFICATION 

LNC-600 Series is a standard DOS-Based controller and also an integrated numerical 

controller product which is designed by Pou Yuen Technology. Its stability in quality is best 

suitable for applications of middle complexity, such as lathe, milling, grinding and all other 

kinds of industrial and automatically tools. 

The following introduces the functional and structure specification of LNC-600 series 

controller. 

1.1 Normal Specification & Option Specification 

Normal Specification 

• Normal G/M Code Operating 

• Background Editing 

• MACRO Program Function 

• External/Internal Program Transmitting Function for DNC 

• Multiple Language Selection (English, Traditional/Simplify Chinese) 

• Picture Simulation Display 

• Soft Interface Extension 

• Hardware Self-Diagnostic Display 

• Additional back-up of Installation floppy disk 

• PLC Ladder Diagram Display 

• Internet Function 

Option Specification 

• CAD/CAM 

LNC Technology Co., Ltd. 1


SPECIFICATION 

1.2 LNC 600 Standard Controller & LNC 600 Compact Controller 

LNC 600 series controller has the following two categories: LNC standard and LNC 

compact. Detailed descriptioin of each category is as below: 

1.2.1 LNC600 Standard Controller 

LNC600 Standard Controller is based on the standard industrial PC which is suitable in 

normal tool machines, industrial machines and automation systems. LNC 600 standard 

controller has excellent maintenance, high performance motion control functions and a lot 

I/O points support which all can be used in all kinds of industries. Moreover, PC open 

system and modularized design will make system function easier to upgrade and to 

maintain. 

1.2.2 LNC600 Compact Controller 

LNC600 compact controller is designed for normal automation system or smaller machines. 

It can save space more effectivly. 

1.2.3 Specifications Table of LNC 600 

Specification 

The exquisite type 

constructing and 

putting 

PC Industrial PC Industrial PC 

Show interfaces VGA interface VGA interface 

The standard type 

constructing and putting 

Transmit interfaces Ethernet , RS- 232/485 Ethernet , RS232 

Store interfaces IDE , FDD , CF IDE , FDD 

Offer the power to export No 5V , 12V 

Deposit and withdraw the 

storing device dynamically Above 32M 

Above 32M 

( SDRAM ) 

Store on the device Above card 32M of CF Above card 32M of CF 

Qualify for the next round of 

competitions in the way 

Servo system 

Qualify for the next round 

of competitions in the 

front 

Offer the position return 

circuit 

The front and qualifying for 

the next round of 

competitions partly 

Offer a return circuit / the 

speed return circuit of 

position to control 

2 LNC Technology Co., Ltd.

Specification 

The exquisite type 

constructing and 

putting 

Offer Pulse control / DA 


SPECIFICATION 

The standard type 

constructing and putting 

Main shaft system 

Offer Pulse control / DA to 

to export 

export 

Remote I/O (bunch arranges 256 inputting /256 256 inputting /256 

I/O) 

exporting 

exporting 

The direct materials 

transmitting ( DNC) 

RS232 19200 Baud Rate RS232 19200 Baud Rate 

The biggest control axle 

counting 

4 axle Pulses 5Pulse or 6Vcmd (Ver2.1 ) 

The axle of the main shaft is 

counted 

An axle 

An axle 

Working temperature 0~55°C 0~55°C 

Input the power 

12V (2A ) , 5V (above 

6A ) 

AC110/220V 50/60HZ 



Software Maintenance 

2 Software Maintenance 

2.1 LNC-M600 Installation Description 

This system has six installation diskettes, wich are [O.S UTILITY], [LNC_M600 INSTALL 

DISK], Text Font Disk and also three anti-virus program diskettes. 

2.1.1 [O.S UTILITY] 

Insert [O.S UTILITY] disk to floppy(A:) or run R.BAT, it shows as below: 

WELCOME TO INSTALL LNC SERIES 

THIS WILL GUIDE YOU TO CREATE AN 

PLATFORM FOR LNC .APP AND UTILITIES. 

--------------VER 2.5--------------- 

1.QUICK MAKE AN BOOTABLE H.D(C) 

2.INSTALL MLC UTILITIES 

3.INSTALL NETWORK UTILITIES 

4.VIRUS SCAN 

5.QUIT 

CHOISE AN OPTION[1,2,3,4,5] 

• QUICK MAKE AN BOOTABLE H.D(C) 

This will install OS to your IPC and make it bootable. Here is the step: 

1. Prepare a formatted CF card. 

2. Set the boot sequence of IPC to A: first 

3. Insert [O.S UTILITY] disk to A: 

4. RESET and boot with A: 

5. Run this option 

6. After all have done, reboot again and change boot sequence of IPC to C ONLY. 

• INSTALL MLC UTILITIES 

This will install MLC utilities to your IPC(OS required). 

• INSTALL NETWORK UTILITIES 

This is install network utilities to your IPC(OS required). 




• VIRUS SCAN 

To scan if the system has virus(OS and scan program required). 

• QUIT 

To quit installation. 

2.1.2 [LNC_M600 INSTALL DISK] 

Execute G.BAT of install disk, the screen will show as below: 

==================================== 

WELCME TO INSTALL LNC-M600 SERIES 

==================================== 

Please read the belows NOTICE first 

before INSTALL task. 

[1]Installing..below tasks are no 

prompting! 

a.The previous File/Directory that 

named "*.BAK" will be killed! 

b.The exist File/Directory that c- 

onflict with SETUP will be renamed 

as "*.bak"! 

Press any key to continue . . . 




After press any key: 

===================================== 

LNC-M600 INSTALL UTILITY V1.20 

Copyright (C) POU CHEN 2002 05/07/2001 

===================================== 

1.Install 

2.Maintain 

3.Quit and Restart 

Choice an Option[1,2,3] 

• Install 

For first time full install or hard disk reconstraction. LNC-M600 SERIES has been 

installed in the disk before sold. This selection is useless under normal usage unless 

the disk has been romatted again. 

• Maintain 

Maintenance selection, there are 3 items below: 

1.PCscan 

Virus checking 

2.DISK doctor 

Disk diagnostic and errer-fix 

3.DEFRAG 

Disk access performance enhancement 

0.Quit 

(1) PCscan:to scan if there are virus in the disk or not. 

(2) DISK Doctor:to scan the disk is broken or not. 

(3) DEFRAG:disk defragment. 




• Quit 

To quit install program and return to DOS. 

2.1.3 Font Disk 

To install fonts, execute G.BAT of install disk. 




2.2 System update 

Please prepare for update source disk before start update, here is the steps: 

1. Enter LNC system. 

2. Enter DGNOS function. 

3. Push EMG-STOP. 

4. Get into update screen and choose “1.update”, show as below: 




5. Press the conform button, then it will show up the dialog room for users to choose the 

installation route.If the route of installation is the floopy. Please input A:1(Prsetting 

route is floopy),then push the conform button.Or, using the divection key to move the 

cursor to the source path selection column and pressing (ok).Please ensure the 

cursor stops at the key-in column and press (ok)in order to process the next 

step.Please below figure as an example: 




6. System up grade conform, then push conform: 

7. After quiting LNC system, then enter the same screen, as first time installation, and 

choose intall for updata. All of the operation show on the screen please follow up the. 

Prieus cheapoder. 




2.3 System Direction Description 

Users will find the following files in the system hardware after running LNC-M600 series 

installation program. 

2.3.1 [OS.UTILTIY] Results 

C:\DOS\ 

C:\ANTIVIR\ 

MC:\MLC\ 

name 

files 

IBM PC_DOS 2000 files(partially) 

Anti-Virus 

Ladder editor 

2.3.2 [LNC_M600 INSTALL DISK] Results 

name 

C:\LNCMILL.BAK 

C:\LNCMILL.B2 

C:\LNCMILL\EXE 

C:\LNCMILL\RESOURCE 

C:\LNCMILL\MACHINE 

C:\LNCMILL\MACRO 

C:\LNCMILL\NCFILES 

C:\LNCMILL\CAMPRJ 

files 

Backup of LNCMILL directory(last 

edition) 

Backup of LNCMILL directory 

(recently edition) 

System files 

Environment relative data files 

(refer to DIR.DOC) 

LADDER and system files 

Canned cycle macro for Standard 

miller(user’s NC files should 

not be here) 

User’s NC files 

(file name must be O0000~O8999) 

CAM project files 

(extended file name is *.DAT) 



Hardware Maintenance 

3 Hardware Maintenance 

3.1 Power supply 

This system uses these power supply: 

Supply 

Brand type Input voltage Output voltage 

target 

LCD module Skynet 

SNP-PA57 AC 110/230V DC 12V/4.2A 

Electronic Co.,Ltd 

60/50HZ 

System Skynet 

Electronic Co.,Ltd 

SNP-Z101 AC 110/230V 

60/50HZ 

DC 5V/11.5A 

DC 12V/3A 

output MEAN WELL 

Enterprises Co.,Ltd 

ADS-15524 AC 110/230V 

60/50HZ 

DC -12V/0.5A 

DC 24V/5.8A 

DC 5V/3A 

3.2 LNC600 Standare Controller 

3.2.1 Standard 

1. Case with 8 slots (including 5V/12V power supply) 

2. Slave I/O (40 Input / 32 Output) 

3. SCSI 68 Pin Cable 

3.2.2 Cabinet Equipment 

1. Standard Operation Panel 

2. Standard Transit Board 

3. Relay Board (40 Input / 32 Output) 

3.2.3 Optional 

1. Extension Slave I/O Board (24 Input / 32 Output) 


3. CD – ROM 

4. Floppy Disk 

3.2.4 PCC1620 Motion Control Card Hardware Specification 

1. 4 axes Pulse / Vcmd control 

2. Spindle control panel Pulse / Vcmd (Encoder Feedback) 

3. Analogy output provides 6 Channel (16 Bits) 

4. I/O highest supports to 256 Input / 256 Output (use remote I/O transmit) 

5. Provide 4 axes Home Sensor 

6. Provide 1 axis MPG +/- 31 Bits Counter 




7. Provide 3 axes disconnect checking (Option) 

3.2.5 I/O Card Specfication 

1. Provide total I/O point is 256 Input / 256 Output 

2. Use CRC error checking function 

3. Transmitting method is Master / Slave 

4. Transmitting distance is able to reach 50 M 




3.2.6 Controller Outlook Chart 

I/O card(SIO-1540) 

Motion Control Card 

PCC1620 

CPU board 

Main machine board and motion control board are as above, 

power supply AC115 ~ 230 V 60/50Hz are able to use them. 




3.2.7 Controller Lights Definition 




3.2.8 System Connection Chart 

VGA 

MDI 

W23 

W16 

W22 

W20 

FLOPPY 

POWER 

W9 

W30 

W15 

W14 

LCD 

POWER 

W19 

RE1 

RE2 

RE3 

RE4 

RE5 

RE6 

RE7 

Transit board 

RE8 

P1 

U1 

P2 

P3 

P6 

P4 

P7 

P5 

P8 

P9 

AC AC PC 

24V,5V 

IN OUT INPUT 

24V GND 

W19 

AC 

INPUT 

W19 

DC 

24V,5V 

W19 

W31 

W18 

Second operation panel 

Loop Connection Chart 1 of Standard Controller 




The controller peripheral connection chart, including MIC2000, TRF1720 Transit Board, 

Operation Panel, REL 2840 Relay Board, Servo Driver, Servo Motor, Spindle Driver, 

Spindle Motor and MPG (Handwheel) connection charts. 

W34 

REL2840 

W32 

W26 

W6 

SIO1520 serial communication extension slot 

W35 

W29 

REL2840 

W36 

RE6 

RE7 

RE3 

RE4 

RE5 

RE1 

RE2 

Transit board 

RE8 

P1 

U1 

P2 

P3 

P6 

P4 

P7 

P5 

P8 

P9 

W1 

W1 

W1 

Y axis servo 

W1 

Z axis servo 

4th axis servo 

X axis servo 

X axis servo motor 

W11 

Y axis servo motor 

W11 

Z axis servo motor 

W11 

4th axis servo motor 

W11 

AC AC PC 

IN OUT 

24V,5V 

INPUT 

24V GND 

W12 

spindle inverter 

(spindle servo) 

W13 

spindle motor 

W21 

W4 

MPG 

spindle motor 

ENCODER 

Peripheral Connection Chart 2 of Standard Controller 




3.3 LNC 600 Compact Controller 

3.3.1 Standard 

1. ELC1000MA Case 

2. ELC-P100A power supply 

3. 10.4"TFT LCD + 12V power supply(SNP-PA57) 

4. SLAVE SIO (40 input/32 output) 

5. SCSI 68 Pin Cable 

3.3.2 Cabinet Equipment 

1. Standard Operation Panel 

2. Standard Transit Board 

3. Relay Board (20 Input / 16 Output) 

3.3.3 Optional 

1. Extension Slave I/O Board (24 Input / 32 Output) 


3. CD – ROM 

3.3.4 PCC1840 Motion Control Board Hardware Specification 

1. 4 axes Pulse control 

2. Spindle control panel Pulse / Vcmd (Encoder Feedback) 

3. Analogy output provides 2 Channel (±15 Bits) 

4. I/O highest supports to 256 Input / 256 Output (use remote I/O transmit) 

5. Provide 4 axes Home Sensor 

6. Provide 1 axis MPG +/- 31 Bits Counter 

3.3.5 I/O Specification 

1. Provide total I/O point is 256 Input / 256 Output 

2. Use CRC error checking function 

3. Transmitting method is Master / Slave 

4. Transmitting distance is able to reach 50 M 




3.3.6 Controller Outlook Chart 

IPC 

Motion 

Control 

Card 




3.3.7 Hardware Description 

The IPC module and the motion control card module constitute ELC1000MA, and ports 

and light definition descript as below: 

ELC1000MA IPC module 

Mark Description Note 

COM1、COM2、FLOPPY、 

IDE、USB、ETHERNET、 

VGA、PS2 

Normal PC interface Some USB devices need 

additional drivers 

CF CARD CF card interface Including system software 

DC POWER 12V GND 5V ELC1000MA power input 

5V(6A or higher) 12V(2A) 

Please check that input value 

is equal to the mark, and try to 

shorten the cable of the power 

supply to prevent voltage 

down. (4.8V or lower might 

make the controller abnormal) 

PCC1840 motion control card module 

Mark Description Note 

RIO1、RIO2 

Serial IO control port. It 

can control 2 IO sets 

Please refer to the instruction 

of the IO card 

LIO PCC1840 ON_BOARD Input 24V, output using open 

IN/OUT 

collector 

MOTION Motion control signal 

output 

E5V light(green) Pulse output signal power Pulse signal can’t be sent 

when the light off 




3.3.8 Basic Control System Connection Chart 

The whole control system module includes: motion control board in the controller, Slaver 

boards in Operation Panel and in Power Cabinet, Relay Board, Transit Board, Servo Driver 

System and Display System. The following is divided into two parts to describe system 

connection chart. 




Second operation panel 

W6 

W35 

W5 

W34 

REL2840 

W36 

REL2840 

ELC-1000 

W2 

P100A 

W29 

RE1 

RE2 

RE3 

RE4 

RE5 

RE6 

RE7 

Transit board 

RE8 

P1 

U1 

P2 

P3 

P6 

P4 

P7 

P5 

P8 

P9 

W1 

W1 

X axis servo 

W1 

Y axis servo 

W1 

Z axis servo 

4th axis servo 

W11 

W11 

W11 

W11 

4th axis servo motor 

X axis servo motor 

Y axis servo motor 

Z axis servo motor 

LCD POWER 

W19 

AC AC PC 24V,5V 

IN OUT INPUT 

24V GND 

W21 

主軸馬達 

W4 

MPG 

W12 

spindle inverter 

(spindle servo) 

W13 

spindle motor 

W22 

VGA 

ENCODER 

MDI 

W23 

W16 

W20 




Note. We offer operation panel OP2520, connecting chart as below 

W8 

W32 

REL1840 

W15 

W9 

DC24V 

OP2520 connecting chart 

Required cables 

Wire No. SPEC Description 

W8 

Low density 15(F)- low density 15(M) OP to transit board 

shelding cable 

ON/OFF 

W9 OP 24V supply 3PIN 18AWG 

W15 

Low density 15(F)—suitable SIO 

master board 

OP to SIO 

W32 

High density 44(M)- high density 44(F) 

shelding cable 

OP to REL 




NOTE. It is is workable that SIO1540 connects to REL2840. Connecting chart as below. 

REL1840 

W16 

W17 

REL1840 

W18 

SIO1540 

SIO1540 and REL1840 connecting chart 




3.4 Hardware Module Description 

This controller uses PC-Based structure. So any hardware matches ISA Bus electronic 

specification can be used on this controller. Please pay attention to the following items 

while using. 

3.4.1 I/O Module 

For simplify the system and reduce the system connection cables, so Pou Yuen innovates 

a new transmitting method. When using this system’s I/O module, motion control board 

(PCC1620) must be used with 1 〜 2 sets of Slave boards in order to transmit between 

I/O. 

Two sets I/O module can provide 128 points Inputs, 128 points Outputs to use. The 

followings are pictures of OP and Slaved Boards: 




Motion control card 

SET 

SET 

2 

IO 0~63 

IO 64~127 IO 64~127 IO 0~63 

24V 




3.4.2 I/O Card 

Besides to 20 Input/16 Output, I/O module of this system can be extended to 128 

Input/128 Output at most. Connecting chart shows as below: 

controller 

RIO port 

Port 1 

Port 2 

SIO mother 

SIO1540 

or 

SIO1520 

REL2840 *2 

REL1820 

Set 1 64/64 

SIO sub 

SIO1530 

REL1820 

SIO mother 

Port 

SIO1540 

1 

or 

Port 

SIO1520 

2 

REL2840 *2 

REL1820 

Set 2 64/64 

SIO sub 

SIO1530 

REL1820 

Note. When string up 2 sets of SIO, please notice the jumper of SIO. (please 

refer to SIO instruction) 

The output voltage of I/O card is 24V, the ability of each point is 100mA at most.The 

determination of input signals: the determination of High level(1)is 20 ~ 28V; the 

determination of Low level(0)is 0 ~ 4V with 10mA input。JPI of SLAVE master board 

inputted DC24V supply form outside. 




3.4.3 I/O card SIO 1520 definition 

3.4.3.1 I/O card SPEC 

To reduce IO cable, we can complete I/O transmission by motion control card with I/O card. 

An I/O card can be divided to SIO 1520 master board(or S1O 1540 master board)and SIO 

1530 slave board. 

One SIO card can offer 40 input and 32 output, and SIO 1530 extension cardcan offer 24 

input and 32 output; in the other word, 1 set of I/O master board and slave board can offfer 

64 input and 64 output totally. LNC 600 can string up 2 set of SIO master board +SIO 

slave board by using RIO connecter, so it can offer 128 input and 128 output at most. 

SIO1520 figure 




A B C 

H 

F 

I 

G 

D 

E 

SIO1520 figure 2 

A:3PIN 5.08 connecter, 24V supply input connecter to POWER SUPPLY 

B:D_SUB15PIN(M), I/O card controlled port, connect to RIO port 

C:D_SUB15PIN(F), connect to next IO master board 

D:40PIN box header 1, for top 32 24V O output, to relay board OUT port 

E:40PIN box header 2, for top 40 24V I input, to relay board IN port 

F:40PIN box header, for bottom 32 O output, to SIO 1530 

G:26PIN box header, for bottom 24 I input, to SIO 1530 

H:The 4 yellow LEDs is the signal of serial I/O communication, when IO master 

board be connected to the motion control card ( the motion control card set 

correctly and given 5V supply from outside), 2 LEDs in the left side will be turn on 

first, after the software be executed 2 LEDs in the right side will be turn on if the 

commnication is successful. In the othr words, all 4 LEDs be turn on means 

communication is correct. If not, please check motion control card, IO card, cable 

connecting, and supply. 

I:Determine the IO master board is first or second IO master board (SLAVE 1 or 

SLAVE 2) 




Ex: 

Refer to the direction of SIO 1520 figure, deep color means short circuit: 

Set as first 

Set as second 




3.4.3.2 SIO 1520 port definition 

• 40PIN box header 1(D)pin definition 

PIN Definition PIN Definition PIN Definition 

1 FG 15 OUT 21 29 OUT 7 

2 FG 16 OUT 22 30 OUT 8 

3 EGND 17 OUT 19 31 OUT 5 

4 EGND 18 OUT 20 32 OUT 6 

5 OUT 31 19 OUT 17 33 OUT 3 

6 EGND 20 OUT 18 34 OUT 4 

7 OUT 29 21 OUT 15 35 OUT 1 

8 OUT 30 22 OUT 16 36 OUT 2 

9 OUT 27 23 OUT 13 37 +24V 

10 OUT 28 24 OUT 14 38 OUT 0 

11 OUT 25 25 OUT 11 39 +24V 

12 OUT 26 26 OUT 12 40 +24V 

13 OUT 23 27 OUT 9 

14 OUT 24 28 OUT 10 

Note: FG:grounding;EGND:+24V gnd 




• 40PIN box header 2(E)pin definition 


1 IN 39 15 IN 25 29 IN 11 

2 IN 38 16 IN 24 30 IN 10 

3 IN 37 17 IN 23 31 IN 9 

4 IN 36 18 IN 22 32 IN 8 

5 IN 35 19 IN 21 33 IN 7 

6 IN 34 20 IN 20 34 IN 6 

7 IN 33 21 IN 19 35 IN 5 

8 IN 32 22 IN 18 36 IN 4 

9 IN 31 23 IN 17 37 IN 3 

10 IN 30 24 IN 16 38 IN 2 

11 IN 29 25 IN 15 39 IN 1 

12 IN 28 26 IN 14 40 IN 0 

13 IN 27 27 IN 13 

14 IN 26 28 IN 12 

Note: FG:grounding;EGND:+24V gnd 




• 40PIN box header(F) 

for bottom 32 O output, to SIO 1530 

• 26PIN box header(G) 

for bottom 24 I input, to SIO 1530 





3.4.4.1 I/O card SPEC 

SIO1530 sub card offers 24 input and 32 output, 24V I/O, but SIO1530 sub card must 

collocate SIO master board, can’t be connected to motion control card directly. 

SIO 1530 slave board figure 




E 

D 

C 

A 

B 

SIO 1530 slave board figure 2 

E 

D 

C 

A 

B 

A:40PIN box header 1, for bottom 32 O output port of each SLAVE set, to REL1820 

output. 

B:40PIN box header 2, for bottom 24 I output port of each SLAVE set, to REL1820. 

C:26PIN box header, for bottom 24 I input, to SIO master board. 

D:40PIN box header, for bottom 43 O output ,to SIO master board. 

E:Green light is the signal of outside 24V supply, the I/O won’t work correctly without 

outside 24V supply. 

SIO 1530 slave board figure 





• 40PIN box header 1(A) 

for bottom 32 O output of each SLAVE set, to REL1820 output 

J1 

1 2 

3 4 

OP63 

5 6 

OP61 

7 8 

OP62 

OP59 

9 10 

OP60 

OP57 

11 12 

OP58 

OP55 

13 14 

OP56 

OP53 

15 16 

OP54 

OP51 

17 18 

OP52 

OP49 

19 20 

OP50 

OP47 

21 22 

OP48 

OP45 

23 24 

OP46 

OP43 

25 26 

OP44 

OP41 

27 28 

OP42 

OP39 

29 30 

OP40 

OP37 

31 32 

OP38 

OP35 

33 34 

OP36 

OP33 

35 36 

OP34 

37 38 

OP32 

+24V 39 40 

+24V 

CON40A 


1 FG 15 OUT 53 29 OUT 39 

2 FG 16 OUT 54 30 OUT 40 

3 EGND 17 OUT 51 31 OUT 37 

4 EGND 18 OUT 52 32 OUT 38 

5 OUT 63 19 OUT 49 33 OUT 35 

6 EGND 20 OUT 50 34 OUT 36 

7 OUT 61 21 OUT 47 35 OUT 33 

8 OUT 62 22 OUT 48 36 OUT 34 

9 OUT 59 23 OUT 45 37 +24V 

10 OUT 60 24 OUT 46 38 OUT 32 

11 OUT 57 25 OUT 43 39 +24V 

12 OUT 58 26 OUT 44 40 +24V 

13 OUT 55 27 OUT 41 

14 OUT 56 28 OUT 42 

Note: FG:grounding 

EGND:+24V GND 




• 40PIN box header 2(B) 

for bottom 24 I input of each SLAVE set, to REL 1820 input port. 

IN63 

IN61 

IN59 

IN57 

IN55 

IN53 

IN51 

IN49 

IN47 

IN45 

IN43 

IN41 

J2 

1 

3 

5 

7 

9 

11 

13 

15 

17 

19 

21 

23 

25 

27 

29 

31 

33 

35 

37 

39 

CON40A 

2 

4 

6 

8 

10 

12 

14 

16 

18 

IN62 

20 

IN60 

22 

IN58 

24 

IN56 

26 

IN54 

28 

IN52 

30 

IN50 

32 

IN48 

34 

IN46 

36 

IN44 

38 

IN42 

40 IN40 


1 FG 15 - 29 IN 51 

2 FG 16 - 30 IN 50 

3 EGND 17 IN 63 31 IN 49 

4 EGND 18 IN 62 32 IN 48 

5 - 19 IN 61 33 IN 47 

6 EGND 20 IN 60 34 IN 46 

7 - 21 IN 59 35 IN 45 

8 - 22 IN 58 36 IN 44 

9 - 23 IN 57 37 IN 43 

10 - 24 IN 56 38 IN 42 

11 - 25 IN 55 39 IN 41 

12 - 26 IN 54 40 IN 40 

13 - 27 IN 53 

14 - 28 IN 52 

Note: FG:grounding 

EGND:+24V GND 





3.4.5.1 I/O card definition 

To save IO cable, we can complete I/O transmission by motion control card with I/O card. 

An I/O card can be divided to SIO 1520 master board(or S1O 1540 master board)and SIO 

1530 slave board. 

One SIO card can offer 40 input and 32 output, and SIO 1530 extension card can offer 24 

input and 32 output; in the other word, 1 set of I/O master board and slave board can 

provide 64 input and 64 output totally. LNC 600 can string up 2 set of SIO master board 

+SIO slave board by using RIO connecter, so it can offer 128 input and 128 output at most. 

SIO 1540 figure 




A 

B 

D 

E 

H 

I 

C 

F 

G 

SIO 1540 figure 2 

A:3PIN 3.81 connecter, 24V supply input connecter to POWER SUPPLY 

B:D_SUB15PIN(M), I/O card controlled port, connect to RIO port 

C:16PIN 2.54 box header, connect to next IO master board 

D:D_SUB high density 44PIN(M), for top 20 IN/16 OUT, to REL 2840 

E:D_SUB high density 44PIN(F), for bottom 20 IN/16 OUT, to REL 2840 

F:40PIN box header, for bottom 32 O output, to SIO 1530 

G:26PIN box header, for bottom 24 I input, to SIO 1530 

H:The 4 yellow LEDs is the signal of serial I/O communication, when IO master 

board be connected to the motion control card ( the motion control card set 

correctly and given 5V supply from outside), 2 LEDs in the left side will be turn on 

first, after the software be executed 2 LEDs in the right side will be turn on if the 

commnication is successful. In the othr words, all 4 LEDs be turn on means 

communication is correct. If not, please check motion control card, IO card, cable 

connecting, and supply. 

I:Determine the IO master board is first or second IO master board (SLAVE 1 or 

SLAVE 2) 




Ex: 

Refer to the direction of SIO 1540 figure, deep color means short circuit: 

Set as first 

Set as second 





• E:44 PIN high density connecter (F) pin definition 

+24V 

IN0 

IN3 

IN6 

IN9 

IN12 

IN15 

IN18 

OP0 

OP3 

OP6 

OP9 

OP12 

OP15 

IN1 

IN4 

IN7 

IN10 

IN13 

IN16 

IN19 

1 

44 

2 

1 

44 

43 

3 

2 

43 

42 

4 

3 

42 

41 

5 

4 

41 

40 

6 

5 

40 

39 

7 

6 

39 

38 

8 

7 

38 

37 

9 

8 

37 

36 

10 

9 

36 

35 

11 

10 

35 

34 

12 

11 

34 

33 

13 

12 

33 

32 

14 

13 

32 

31 

15 

14 

31 

30 

16 

15 

30 

29 

17 

16 

29 

28 

18 

17 

28 

27 

19 

18 

27 

26 

20 

19 

26 

25 

21 

20 

25 

24 

22 

21 

24 

23 

22 23 

OP14 

OP11 

OP8 

OP5 

OP2 

IN17 

IN14 

IN11 

IN8 

IN5 

IN2 

OP13 

OP10 

OP7 

OP4 

OP1 


1 IN 0 16 IN 1 31 IN 2 

2 IN 3 17 IN 4 32 IN 5 

3 IN 6 18 IN 7 33 IN 8 

4 IN 9 19 IN 10 34 IN 11 

5 IN 12 20 IN 13 35 IN 14 

6 IN 15 21 IN 16 36 IN 17 

7 IN 18 22 IN 19 37 OUT 2 

8 OUT 0 23 OUT 1 38 OUT 5 

9 OUT 3 24 OUT 4 39 OUT 8 

10 OUT 6 25 OUT 7 40 OUT 11 

11 OUT 9 26 OUT 10 41 OUT 14 

12 OUT 12 27 OUT 13 42 X 

13 OUT 15 28 X 43 +24V 

14 X 29 X 44 +24V 

15 EGND 30 EGND X X 




D:44 PIN high density connecter (M) pin definition 

+24V 

IN20 

IN23 

IN26 

IN29 

IN32 

IN35 

IN38 

OP16 

OP19 

OP22 

OP25 

OP28 

OP31 

IN21 

IN24 

IN27 

IN30 

IN33 

IN36 

IN39 

1 

44 

2 

1 

44 

43 

3 

2 

43 

42 

4 

3 

42 

41 

5 

4 

41 

40 

6 

5 

40 

39 

7 

6 

39 

38 

8 

7 

38 

37 

9 

8 

37 

36 

10 

9 

36 

35 

11 

10 

35 

34 

12 

11 

34 

33 

13 

12 

33 

32 

14 

13 

32 

31 

15 

14 

31 

30 

16 

15 

30 

29 

17 

16 

29 

28 

18 

17 

28 

27 

19 

18 

27 

26 

20 

19 

26 

25 

21 

20 

25 

24 

22 

21 

24 

23 

22 23 

OP30 

OP27 

OP24 

OP21 

OP18 

IN37 

IN34 

IN31 

IN28 

IN25 

IN22 

OP29 

OP26 

OP23 

OP20 

OP17 


1 IN 20 16 IN 21 31 IN 22 

2 IN 23 17 IN 24 32 IN 25 

3 IN 26 18 IN 27 33 IN 28 

4 IN 29 19 IN 30 34 IN 31 

5 IN 32 20 IN 33 35 IN 34 

6 IN 35 21 IN 36 36 IN 37 

7 IN 38 22 IN 39 37 OUT 18 

8 OUT 16 23 OUT 17 38 OUT 21 

9 OUT 19 24 OUT 20 39 OUT 24 

10 OUT 22 25 OUT 23 40 OUT 27 

11 OUT 25 26 OUT 26 41 OUT 30 

12 OUT 28 27 OUT 29 42 X 

13 OUT 31 28 X 43 +24V 

14 X 29 X 44 +24V 





3.4.6 Transit Board (TRF1720) Module 

3.4.6.1 Transit Board Component Placement Chart 




3.4.6.2 Transit Board Slots Define 

To MPG 

RE7 

RE8 

P1 X AXIS 

To X axis servo driver 

RE6 

RE5 

U1 FROM CNC 

P2 Y AXIS 

To Y axis servo driver 

RE4 

P6 MPG 

P3 Z AXIS 

To Z axis servo driver 

RE3 

RE2 

RE1 

P7 SP ENC 

P8 ON/OFF 

P4 4 AXIS 

P5 SP AXIS 

To 4th axis servo driver 

To Spindle ENCODER 

To Spindle converter(servo) 

P9 I/O 

To RELAY board 

To OP D type 15PIN(F) 

Transit board servo system signal pin define 




• P1 pin description 

X AXIS 

P1 

13 

25 

12 

24 

11 

23 

10 

22 

9 

21 

8 

20 

7 

19 

6 

18 

5 

17 

4 

16 

3 

15 

2 

14 

1 

/1B 

1B 

/1A 

1A 

/1C 

1C 

SVI_COM 

X_ALARM 

SERON 

+24V 

AGND 

DACO1 

P1A 

P1B 

/P1A 

/P1B 

CONNECTOR DB25 

X axis(P1) 

Pin signal description Pin signal description 

1 /P1B pulse command /B 14 /P1A pulse command /A 

2 P1B pulse command B 15 P1A pulse command A 

3 16 

4 GND GND 17 DACO1 Analog output 

5 AGND Analog output GND 18 +24V +24Voutput 

6 SERON SERVO ON 19 X_ALARM SERVO_ALM input 

7 GND GND 20 SVI_COM SERVO_ALM COM 

8 SVI_COM SERVO_ALM COM 21 GND GND 

9 22 

10 1C ENCODER feedback C 23 /1C ENCODER feedback /C 

11 1A ENCODER feedback A 24 /1A ENCODER feedback /A 

12 1B ENCODER feedback B 25 /1B ENCODER feedback /B 

13 FG Grounding 





Y AXIS 

P2 

13 

25 

12 

24 

11 

23 

10 

22 

9 

21 

8 

20 

7 

19 

6 

18 

5 

17 

4 

16 

3 

15 

2 

14 

1 

/2B 

2B 

/2A 

2A 

/2C 

2C 

SVI_COM 

Y_ALARM 

SERON 

+24V 

AGND 

DACO2 

GND 

P2A 

P2B 

/P2A 

/P2B 


Y axis(P2) 




3 16 


5 AGND Analog output GND 18 +24V +24Voutput 

6 SERON SERVO ON 19 Y_ALARM SERVO_ALM input 



9 22 




13 FG grounding 





Z AXIS 

P3 

13 

25 

12 

24 

11 

23 

10 

22 

9 

21 

8 

20 

7 

19 

6 

18 

5 

17 

4 

16 

3 

15 

2 

14 

1 

/3B 

3B 

/3A 

3A 

/3C 

3C 

SVI_COM 

Z_ALARM 

SERON 

+24V 

AGND 

DACO3 

P3A 

P3B 

/P3A 

/P3B 


Z axis(P3) 




3 16 

4 GND +24V GND 17 DACO1 Analog output 

5 AGND Analog outputGND 18 +24V +24Voutput 

6 SERON SERVO ON 19 Z_ALARM SERVO_ALM input 


8 SVI_COM SERVO_ALM COM 21 GND +24V GND 

9 22 




13 FG grounding 





4 AXIS 

P4 

13 

25 

12 

24 

11 

23 

10 

22 

9 

21 

8 

20 

7 

19 

6 

18 

5 

17 

4 

16 

3 

15 

2 

14 

1 

/4B 

4B 

/4A 

4A 

/4C 

4C 

SVI_COM 

4_ALARM 

SERON 

+24V 

AGND 

DACO4 

P4A 

P4B 

/P4A 

/P4B 


4 th axis(P4) 

Pin signal description Pin signal Description 



3 16 


5 AGND Analog outputGND 18 +24V +24Voutput 

6 SERON SERVO ON 19 4_ALARM SERVO_ALM input 



9 22 




13 FG 





SPINDLE 

P5 

13 

25 

12 

24 

11 

23 

10 

22 

9 

21 

8 

20 

7 

19 

6 

18 

5 

17 

4 

16 

3 

15 

2 

14 

1 

LM0 

LM1 

SPI_COM 

P4A 

P4B 

/P4A 

/P4B 

SPCW 

SPCCW 

SPFRST 

SPJOG 

IN1V 

AGND 

DACO5 

SPALARM 

+24V 


Spindle control contact(P5) 


1 14 

2 15 

3 SPALARM 

Excrescent output in 

inverter 

4 GND GND 17 DACO5 

16 

Analog control voltage 

10V 

5 AGND 

Analog control voltage 

18 +24V 

0V 

+24Voutput 

6 IN1V Empty connecting 19 SPJOG Empty connecting 

7 SPFRST 

Inverter RESET control 

Inverter CCW control 

20 SPCCW 

signal 

signal 

8 SPCW 

Inverter CW control 

21 GND 

signal 

GND 

9 /P4B pulse command/B 22 /P4A pulse command/A 

10 P4B pulse commandB 23 P4A pulse commandA 

11 SPI_COM Inverter control COM 24 SPI_COM Inverter control COM 

12 LM1 

To inverter surveillance 

current 

13 FG gnd 

25 LM0 

To inverter surveillance 

current 





MPG 

E5V 

P6 

8 

15 

7 

14 

6 

13 

5 

12 

4 

11 

3 

10 

2 

9 

1 

+24V 

MPGS1 

MPGS2 

MPGS3 

MPGR1 

MPGR2 

6A 

/6A 

6B 

/6B 

MPGS4 


MPG(P6) 


1 +24V +24V output 9 GND (24V,5V)GND 

2 MPGS4 MPG selects 4 10 FG Gnd 

3 /6B MPG pulse /B input 11 6B MPG pulse B input 

4 /6A MPG pulse /A input 12 6A MPG pulse A input 

5 MPGR2 MPG speed input2 13 MPGR1 MPG speed input1 

6 MPGS3 MPG selects 3 14 MPGS2 MPG selects 2 

7 MPGS1 MPG selects 1 15 E5V Provide the MPG5V 

8 E5V Provide the MPG5V 





SPINDLE ENCODER 

E5V 

P7 

5 

9 

4 

8 

3 

7 

2 

6 

1 

5A 

/5A 

5B 

/5B 

5C 

/5C 

CONNECTOR DB9 

Spindle ENCODER feedback(P7) 


1 EGND E5V gnd 6 /5C ENCODER feedback /C 

2 5C ENCODER feedback C 7 /5B ENCODER feedback /B 

3 5B ENCODER feedback B 8 /5A ENCODER feedback /A 

4 5A ENCODER feedback A 9 FG Gnd 

5 E5V Supply 5V 




• U1 pin definition 

6A 

/6A 

6B 

/6B 

HS1 

HS2 

HS3 

HS4 

1A 

/1A 

1B 

/1B 

1C 

/1C 

2A 

/2A 

2B 

/2B 

2C 

/2C 

P1A 

/P1A 

P1B 

/P1B 

P2A 

/P2A 

P2B 

/P2B 

AGND 

DACO1 

DACO3 

DACO5 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

U1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

6C 

/6C 

P4A 

/P4A 

P4B 

/P4B 

3A 

/3A 

3B 

/3B 

3C 

/3C 

4A 

/4A 

4B 

/4B 

4C 

/4C 

5A 

/5A 

5B 

/5B 

5C 

/5C 

P3A 

/P3A 

P3B 

/P3B 

AGND 

DACO2 

DACO4 

DACO6 

E5V 

SCSI2-68/F 

Motion control card connecter(U1) 

Pin signal description I/O Pin signal description I/O 

1 

ENC_IN6 A phases of 

Outside+5V 

in 35 E5V 

A encoder 6 

power supply 

In 

2 

/ENC_IN6 /A phases of in 

A encoder 6 

36 

3 

ENC_IN6 B phases of in ENC_IN6 C phases of In 

37 

B encoder 6 

C encoder 6 

4 

/ENC_IN6 /B phases of In /ENC_IN6 /C phases of In 

38 

B encoder 6 

C encoder 6 

5 HS1 

Remote IN 0 In 

A phases of axis 

39 P3A 

3 

out 

6 HS2 

Remote IN 1 in 

/A phases of axis out 

40 /P3A 

3 

7 HS3 


B phases of axis out 

41 P3B 

3 

8 HS4 


/B phases of axis out 

42 /P3B 

3 

9 

ENC_IN1 A phases of in ENC_IN3 A phases of in 

43 

A encoder 1 

A encoder 3 




10 

/ENC_IN1 /A phases of in /ENC_IN3 /A phases of in 

44 

A encoder 1 

A encoder 3 

11 

ENC_IN1 B phases of in ENC_IN3 B phases of in 

45 

B encoder 1 

B encoder 3 

12 

/ENC_IN1 /B phases of in /ENC_IN3 /B phases of in 

46 

B encoder 1 

B encoder 3 

13 

ENC_IN1 C phases of in ENC_IN3 C phases of in 

47 

C encoder 1 

C encoder 3 

14 

/ENC_IN1 /C phases of in /ENC_IN3 /C phases of in 

48 

C encoder 1 

C encoder 3 

15 

ENC_IN2 A phases of in ENC_IN4 A phases of in 

49 

A encoder 2 

A encoder 4 

16 

/ENC_IN2 /A phases of in /ENC_IN4 /A phases of in 

50 

A encoder 2 

A encoder 4 

17 

ENC_IN2 B phases of in ENC_IN4 B phases of in 

51 

B encoder 2 

B encoder 4 

18 

/ENC_IN2 /B phases of in /ENC_IN4 /B phases of in 

52 

B encoder 2 

B encoder 4 

19 

ENC_IN2 C phases of in ENC_IN4 C phases of in 

53 

C encoder 2 

C encoder 4 

20 

/ENC_IN2 /C phases of in /ENC_IN4 /C phases of in 

54 

C encoder 2 

C encoder 4 

21 GND GND 55 

ENC_IN5 A phases of in 

A encoder 5 

22 GND GND 56 

/ENC_IN5 /A phases of in 

A encoder 5 

23 P0A 

A phases of axis out ENC_IN5 B phases of in 

57 

0 

B encoder 5 

24 /P0A 

/A phases of axis out /ENC_IN5 /B phases of in 

58 

0 

B encoder 5 

25 P0B 

B phases of axis out ENC_IN5 C phases of in 

59 

0 

C encoder 5 

26 /P0B 

/B phases of axis out /ENC_IN5 /C phases of in 

60 

0 

C encoder 5 

27 P1A 

A phases of axis out 

A phases of axis 

61 P2A 

1 

2 

out 

28 /P1A 



62 /P2A 

1 

2 

29 P1B 



63 P2B 

1 

2 

30 /P1B 



64 /P2B 

1 

2 

31 GND GND 65 GND GND 

32 S_IN0 Remote IN 4 in 66 S_IN2 Remote IN 6 in 

33 S_IN1 Remote IN 5 in 67 DACO3 D/A Output 3 out 

34 DACO4 D/A Output 4 out 68 S_IN3 Remote IN 7 in 




• P8、P9 pin definiton 

OTR2 

OTR1 

P8 

DB15/F 

8 

15 

7 

14 

6 

13 

5 

12 

4 

11 

3 

10 

2 

9 

1 

ON1 

ON2 

ESP1 

ESP2 

OFF1 

OFF2 

OFFL 

SERONL 

OT1 

+24V 

SVI_COM 

RE6 

SERONL 

SERON 

NCRDY1 

NCRDY2 

P9 

1 

14 

2 

15 

3 

16 

4 

17 

5 

18 

6 

19 

7 

20 

8 

21 

9 

22 

10 

23 

11 

24 

12 

25 

13 

SPI_COM 

ESP2 

SPI_COM 

SPALARM 

MPGS3 

MPGS4 

ESP/OT ALARM 

ESPAM 

XALARM 

YALARM 

ZALARM 

4ALARM 

MPGS1 

MPGS2 

MPGR1 

MPGR2 

SPCW 

SPCCW 

SPFRST 

IN1V 

SPJOG 

R6 

R-DPDT 

D6 

DIODE 

LED6 

4.7K LED 


C2 

SPARK GAP CAP 

RE8 

110V 

DRIVER 

R-DPDT 

D8 

DIODE 

R8 

LED8 

4.7K 

LED 

(Note)For P8, if the user does not use the OP panel that our company provide, please 

consult connecting methods. 




• P9 pin definition 

MPGI/O 

P6 

SP I/O 

P5 

P9 

RELAY 

Servo I/O 

P1 ~ P4 

TRF 1720 

P9 wiring chart 

I/O(P9) 

Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 

1 14 

2 SPI_COM Inverter control COM 15 SPI_COM Inverter control COM 

3 SPALARM Inverter abnormal output 16 MPGS3 MPG Z axis output 

4 MPGS4 MPG 4 th axis output 17 

5 ESPAM 

SERVO main circuit control, 

SERVO ON control, drive 

18 NC_READ 

match with the J1 usage 

by OUT +24V 

6 XALARM 

X axis servo abnormal 

19 YALARM 

Y axis servo abnormal 

output 

7 ZALARM 

Z axis servo abnormal 

output 

20 4ALARM 

8 MPGS1 MPGX axis output 21 MPGS2 MPG Y axis output 

9 MPGR1 MPG speed output1 22 MPGR2 MPG speed output2 

10 SPCW Inverter CW control signal 23 

output 

4 th axis servo abnormal 

output 

11 SPFREST 

Inverter RESET control 

signal 

24 

12 IN1V Empty connecting 25 SPJOG Empty connecting 

13 GND GND 




• Transit board wiring desctiption 

SPINDLE ORIENTATION SENSOR 

24V HS4 24V HS3 24V HS2 24V HS1 LM0 LM1 

TO REL2840-1 

TO SP INVERTER 

TO 4 AXIS DRIVER 

TO Z AXIS DRIVER 

TO Y AXIS DRIVER 

TO IPC MOTION 

TO X AXIS DRIVER 

OTX 

OTY OTZ 

TO IPC POWER IN 

DC 5V INPUT 5A 

DC 24V INPUT 2A 

GND GND 24V 24V 5V FG GND 24V 110V AC0 

110V AC0 110V AC0 

DC POWER INPUT PC POWER AC OUTPUT AC INPUT 

FUSE FUSE 

DC5V 

5A 

DC24V 

5A 

FUSE 

AC110V 

5A 

AC0 

110V 

DRIVER ON 

X ALARM RELAY 

Y ALARM RELAY 

Z ALARM RELAY 

4 ALARM RELAY 

PC POWER ON 

MOTION 

SERVO READY 

DRIVER POWER 

24V POWER ON 

A1 

A2 

AC 110V INPUT 

TO OP2520 ON/OFF 

MPG 




3.4.6.3 The servo starts to protect the loop desctiption 

Explain as follows the Power ON and servos start to protect the loop, ising shown as chart 

below: 

+24V 

ON1 

RE7 

ON2 

RE7 

RE7 

OT1 

OT2 

OTR1 

OTR2 

OFF1 

ESP1 

ESP2 

ESP/OT ALARM 

OFF2 

NCRDY1 

NCRDY2 

RE5 

RE7 

RE8 

RE6 

GND 

ONL 

OFFL 

SERONL 

GND 

SERON 

RE5 

RE6 

RE8 

Being responsible for the CNC controller power supply starts. 

Being responsible for the servo enables.( Servo On) 

Being responsible for the driver power supply starts. 

So when have the over travel or urgent breakup switches, the servo enable and drive 

the power supply and will be cut off, to protect the Human body safety. 

OTR 

NCRDY1, 

The over travel relieves, when occurrence over travel, can depend 

on this OTR the relief the over travel the protection, but need the 

special caution 

CNC ready. 

NCRDY2 

According to ascend the chart show, when the servo can't enable, needing the inspection 

1. Whether over travel 




2. Whether have the urgent switch to be used for 

3. Is CNC ready 

4. Does the servo electrical appliance characteristic match 

5. Does the DC24V enter the transit board 




3.4.7 Transit board(TRF2760) Module 

3.4.7.1 Transit board component arrangement plan 

J9 

RE4 

RE3 

SI2 

J8 

E 

RE2 

J12 

J13 

RE1 

J11 

J7 

A 

P8 

J10 

J6 

D 

P9 

B 

P7 

J5 

P6 

P5 

J4 

C 

P4 

J3 

P3 

U 

P2 

1 

J2 

P1 

J1 

SI1 

SI3 




3.4.7.2 Transit board slots definition 

Connecter Type Description Wiring instruction 

P1 ~ P4 D_SUB 25PIN(F) 4 axisPULSE axis To servo 

P5 D_SUB 25PIN(F) 1620V2.0 PULSE axis5 To servo 

P6 D_SUB 25PIN(F) 1620V2.0 MPG To MPG 

P7 D_SUB 25PIN(F) 1620V2.0 Vcmd axis1 To servo 

P8 D_SUB 15PIN(F) Control signal of ON/OFF To Operation panel 

P9 D_SUB 9PIN(F) 1620 V2.0 ENC 6th transit To 1620 V2.0 P4 

J1 4PIN 5.08mm plug-in DC(24V、5V) supply input To POWER 

J2 ~ J5 4PIN 5.08mm plug-in HOME(*) and OT contact To SENSOR 

J6 4PIN 5.08mm plug-in OT contact To SENSOR 

J7 4PIN 5.08mm plug-in ALARM1~4 To RELAY board IN 

J13 3PIN 5.08mm plug-in ALARM5 ~6、ESP examination To RELAY board IN 

J8 2PIN 5.08mm plug-in All servo RESET signal To RELAY board 

contact 

J9 2PIN 5.08mm plug-in All servo READY signal To RELAY board 

contact 

J10 2PIN 5.08mm plug-in PC uses AC POWER out To PC AC POWER 

J11 2PIN 5.08mm plug-in Servo uses POWER out To servo POWER 

J12 2PIN 5.08mm plug-in System AC POWER in To AC supply 

U1 SCSI- Ⅱ 68PIN Motion control signal contact To 68PIN connecter 

motion control card 

(Note)The ONBOARD HOME only provides 4 spots, toing annex the other 

HOME spot to need through SIO board. 




P1 ~ P7 pin definition 

The graphic is to take X axis P1 as an example. 

X AXIS 

P1 

13 

25 

12 

24 

11 

23 

10 

22 

9 

21 

8 

20 

7 

19 

6 

18 

5 

17 

4 

16 

3 

15 

2 

14 

1 

/0B 

0B 

/0A 

0A 

/0C 

0C 

RESET 

SVI_COM 

ALARM1 

SERON 

+24V 

DACO0 

E5V 

P0A 

P0B 

/P0A 

/P0B 


Servo axis control signal(P1 ~ P7) 

pin signal description pin signal description 

1 /PB 

2 PB 

The PULSE output differential 

signal output by spindle/B 

he PULSE output differential 

signal output by spindle B 

14 /PA 

15 PA 

The PULSE output 

differential signal output by 

spindle/A 

he PULSE output 

differential signal output by 

spindle A 

3 16 

4 EGND +24V gnd 17 DAC_OUT analog output of each axis 

5 AGND Analog output gnd 18 +24V +24V supply 

output control signal of 

6 SERON 19 

SERVO-ON 

ALRAM alarm output of servo axis 

7 EGND +24V gnd 20 SVI_COM COM of servo IN 

8 SVI_COM The COM spot of the servo IN 21 EGND +24V gnd 

9 22 

10 C 

Differential feedback in Z 

phase(INDEX) encoder signal C 

23 /C 

11 A 

Differential feedback in A phase 

24 

encoder signal A 

/A 

12 B 

Differential feedback in B phase 

25 

encoder signal B 

/B 

13 FGND gnd 

Differential feedback in Z 

phase( INDEX) encoder 

signal /C 

Differential feedback in A 

phase encoder signal /A 

Differential feedback in B 

phase encoder signal /B 




Connecter PULSE ENCODER Analog output 

P1 0 0 0 P1 0 0 

P2 1 1 1 P2 1 1 

P3 2 2 2 P3 2 2 

P4 3 3 3 P4 3 3 

P5 V2.0-4; 4 4 P5 V2.0-4; 4 

V1.0-none 

V1.0-none 

P6 None V2.0-6 ; V2.0-none; P6 None V2.0-6 ; 

V1.0-5 V1.0-5 

V1.0-5 

P7 None V2.0-5 ; V2.0-5 ; P7 None V2.0-5 ; 

V1.0-none V1.0-none 

V1.0-none 

Connecter PULSE ENCODER Analog 

output 

Connecter PULSE ENCODER 

The relation of connecter and PULSE 





C1 

0.01u 

C2 

1 2 

SPARKGAP 

110V 

RE1 

4 

3 5 

7 

6 8 

PCPWD 

PCPWD 

1 2 

2 

D1 

1 

R-DPDT 

DIODE 

R9 

LED3 

1 2 

4.7K 

LED 

C4 

+24V 

0.01u 

OTR2 

OTR1 

P9 

8 

15 

7 

14 

6 

13 

5 

12 

4 

11 

3 

10 

2 

9 

1 

ON1 

ON2 

ESP1 

ESP2 

OFF1 

OFF2 

OFFL 

SERONL 

OT62 

OT11 

R12 

RE3 

4 

3 5 

7 

6 8 

1 2 

R-DPDT 

D4 

2 1 

DIODE 

LED6 

1 2 

ON2 

OFFL 

OT11 

DB15/F 

4.7K 

LED 

ON/OFF control connecter(P8) 


1 OT11(OTR1) 

Over travel contact 

ESP push button point of 

1(J2Pluggable type 

9 ESP1(OTR2) contact 1( and OT2, OTR2 

terminal block can 

connectivity) 

derivation) 

2 10 

3 11 

4 SERONL 

On the OP light-on signal in 

servo ON( working hour 

gnd of) 

12 OFFL 

5 EGND gnd 13 OFF2 

6 OFF1 

7 ESP1 

8 ON1 


The OFF press button on 

carrying on the OP, 

connecting with ON2 

ESP push button point of 

contact 1( and OT2, OTR2 

connectivity) 

The ON press button on 

carrying on the OP (+24 

Vs) 

14 ESP2 

15 ON2 

OFF presses button lamp, 

controlled by RE2 b spot 

The OFF presses button 

another side 

The ESP presses button 

another side, the ESP/ OT 

ALRAM detecting spot 

The ON presses button on 

the OP of another side, 

connect with OFF1 




P9 

1 

6 

2 

7 

3 

8 

4 

9 

5 

DACO5 

5A 

/5A 

5B 

/5B 

5C 

/5C 

DB9/F 

V2.0 6 th ENCODER(ENC5) connecter(P9) 


1 AGND Analog output gnd 6 DAC5 Analog output 6 th 

2 5A Encoder feedback A 7 /5A Encoder feedback /A 

3 5B Encoder feedback B 8 /5B Encoder feedback /B 

4 5C Encoder feedback C 9 /5C Encoder feedback /C 

5 




3.4.7.3 Transit board wiring description 

TO IPC POWER IN 

TO IPC MOTION 

FUSE 

AC110V 

DRV_PWR 

RELAY 

RDY2 RDY1 

PC_PWR 

RELAY 

RST2 

RST1 

TO OP ON/OFF 

AC0 110V 

AC0 DRV_PWD AC0 PCPWD 

ON_OFF 

SERVO ON 

RELAY 

RELAY 

ON_OFF 

ENC 

SP_AXIS 

ESP2 ALM6 ALM5 ALM4 ALM3 ALM2 ALM1 OT62 OT61 OT52 OT51 OT42 OT41 +24V HS4 

I68 

I67 I66 I65 I64 

TO MPG 

MPG 

5_AXIS 

OT32 OT31 +24V HS3 

MOTION 

4-AXIS 

Z-AXIS 

Y-AXIS 

OT22 OT21 +24V HS2 OT12 OT11 +24V HS1 

X-AXIS 

FG 

5V 

TO SPINDLE INVERTER 

TO 4 AXIS DRIVER 

TO Z AXIS DRIVER 

TO Y AXIS DRIVER 

TO X AXIS DRIVER 

FUSE 

DC5V 

FUSE 

DC24V 

GND +24V 




3.4.7.4 Adjustment and setting 

• A:This spot can set servo input COM spot mode, 

According to the servo of different to set to GND or 24 V. 

As follows chart, the gray represents the Jumper. 

24V 

24V 

SVI:GND 

SVI:24V 

• B:This spot can set usage motion control card type, when usage PCC1620 

V1.0( or other an axisPULSE calorie) please slice all of the SW go to mark the 

place of" ON";While using the V2.0 version please slice to the OFF all. 

As follows chart. 

ON 

ON 

All ON:PCC1620 V1.0 

PCC1840 

All OFF:PCC1620 V2.0 




3.4.7.5 LCD signals 

E 

SI2 

D 

C 

SI1 

SI3 

Code of 

chart 

C 

D 

E 

Name 

HOME spot and 

OT pilot LCD 

OT5 、 OT6 pilot 

LCD 

RE1、RE2、RE3、 

RE4 relay working 

pilot LCD 

SI1 DC24V Fuse Pilot LCD LED11 

SI2 AC IN Fuse Pilot LCD LED12 

SI3 DC5V Fuse Pilot LCD LED13 

Description 

By down highest is a HS1/ OT1 respectively~ 

HS4/ OT4 pilot LCD, when HS pilot LCD is bright 

indicate to have the 24 Vs to lead into the HS to 

click;When OT pilot LCD is bright indicate to have 

no the super - stroke occurrence.( general usage 

b point of contact) 

When OT pilot LCD is bright indicate to have no 

the super - stroke occurrence.( general usage b 

point of contact) 

RE1:The SERVO_ON signal control uses, when 

SERVO_ON the LCD is bright 

RE2:The power supply ON/ OFF uses, being the 

ON key to press the LCD of hour bright 

RE3:The PC POWERoutput uses, when the PC 

power supply ON the LCD of hour is bright 

RE4:The DRIVER power supply output uses, 

when the DRIVER power supply ON the LCD of 

hour is bright 




3.4.8 Operation panel module 

3.4.8.1 Operation panel chart 




3.4.8.2 Operation panel I/O definition 




3.4.8.3 New operation panel arrangement plan(OP2520) 

3.4.8.4 The I/O chart of new operation panel(OP2520) 




3.4.8.5 REL2840 SPEC 

REL 2840 figure 

Providing 20 input pluggable type terminal blocks. 

The output end provides the 2 set A, B, the point of contact of C and 14 set A, the point of 

contact of C to add up to 16 set output spots 

The output point of contact capacity as the 250 V/6 A of AC 




A 

C 

B 

REL 2840 figure 2 

A:44 PIN D-SUB high definition connecter(F) 20 IN / 16 OUT to I/O card. 

B:5.08mm pluggable type terminal blocks 1, output spot outward connect terminal. 

C:5.08mm pluggable type terminal blocks 2, input spot outward connect terminal. 

Note 1:The pluggable type terminal block of C provides the 20 0 Vses and 20 adapters 

and inputs to click the concert usage. 

Note 2:Each relay has it to should red LED, relay after arousing the magnetic belt and 

workings because of the output spot, the LED will click then bright, the debugging 

of available this progress relay and output spot uses. 




3.4.8.6 REL2840 connecting port definition 

• B:44 PIN high definition connecter(F) pin definition 

+24V 

IN0 

IN3 

IN6 

IN9 

IN12 

IN15 

IN18 

OP0 

OP3 

OP6 

OP9 

OP12 

OP15 

IN1 

IN4 

IN7 

IN10 

IN13 

IN16 

IN19 

1 

44 

2 

1 

44 

43 

3 

2 

43 

42 

4 

3 

42 

41 

5 

4 

41 

40 

6 

5 

40 

39 

7 

6 

39 

38 

8 

7 

38 

37 

9 

8 

37 

36 

10 

9 

36 

35 

11 

10 

35 

34 

12 

11 

34 

33 

13 

12 

33 

32 

14 

13 

32 

31 

15 

14 

31 

30 

16 

15 

30 

29 

17 

16 

29 

28 

18 

17 

28 

27 

19 

18 

27 

26 

20 

19 

26 

25 

21 

20 

25 

24 

22 

21 

24 

23 

22 23 

P1 

HD44P/F 

OP14 

OP11 

OP8 

OP5 

OP2 

IN17 

IN14 

IN11 

IN8 

IN5 

IN2 

OP13 

OP10 

OP7 

OP4 

OP1 


1 IN 0 16 IN 1 31 IN 2 

2 IN 3 17 IN 4 32 IN 5 

3 IN 6 18 IN 7 33 IN 8 

4 IN 9 19 IN 10 34 IN 11 

5 IN 12 20 IN 13 35 IN 14 

6 IN 15 21 IN 16 36 IN 17 

7 IN 18 22 IN 19 37 OUT 2 

8 OUT 0 23 OUT 1 38 OUT 5 

9 OUT 3 24 OUT 4 39 OUT 8 

10 OUT 6 25 OUT 7 40 OUT 11 

11 OUT 9 26 OUT 10 41 OUT 14 

12 OUT 12 27 OUT 13 42 X 

13 OUT 15 28 X 43 +24V 

14 X 29 X 44 +24V 





3.4.8.7 LCD module 




3.5 The self protecting 

3.5.1 Twin CF card( be applicable to the Compact controller) 

A Compact controller provides with a pair of CF card mechanisms, handling the backup 

work in order to, the probability that can reduce significantly to damage and can't process 

because of the file.Introduce every kind of function and operation methods of a pair of CF 

cards as follows. 

3.5.1.1 Automatic backup 

In 2 kinds of opportune moments in the following, a CF card automatic backup file: 

1. After entering the system, be placed in for the first time 【ready】 time of appearance, 

automatic backup machine catalogue under of file. 

2. While carrying out the network function( C:\ NET\2 NET.BATs) each time, the 

automatic backup network sets the related file. 

3.5.1.2 While can't entering the system normally solving method 

Ask below a few methods in usage to enter the system: 

1. If can switch on but can't enter the system, can in the C:\> hint the sign under the 

inputres(, switch on to enter the system then and normally again.Please don't take out 

the second CF card to leave the IPC. 

2. While can't switching on completely, please take out the first CF card to leave the IPC, 

then switch on again, will start the system with the second CF card at this time. 

3. Please contact the attendant, our company will provide a new CF card, inserting this 

CF card into the IPC, system will the automatic revivification lay equal stress on new 

switch on, can immediately enter the system normally after.Please don't take out the 

second CF card to leave the IPC. 



MLC Maintenance -- C,S Bits and Register 

4 MLC Maintenance -- C,S Bits and Register 

4.1 C Bits Definition 

C BIT MLC CNC 

BIT # SYMBOL Description Pagination 

000 ST Cycle Start 83 

001 SP Feed Hold 83 

003 PPROT Prog Protect 83 

004 MANRET Manual Return 84 

006 +X +X Axis Direction 84 

007 -X -X Axis Direction 84 

008 +Y +Y Axis Direction 84 

009 -Y -Y Axis Direction 84 

010 +Z +Z Axis Direction 84 

011 -Z -Z Axis Direction 84 

012 +4 +4 Axis Direction 84 

013 -4 -4 Axis Direction 84 

016 HX Handle X Axis 84 

017 HY Handle Y Axis 84 

018 HZ Handle Z Axis 84 

019 H4 Handle 4th Axis 84 

020 MPGDRN MPG Dry Run 84 

021 SCNSAV Wake up the screen saver signal 84 

023 RT Rapid 85 

031 HOMEX X Axis Home DOG Signal 85 

032 HOMEY Y Axis Home DOG Signal 85 

033 HOMEZ Z Axis Home DOG Signal 85 

034 HOME4 4th Axis Home DOG Signal 85 

036 ESP Emergency Stop 86 

037 ERS External Reset 86 

038 FIN M, S, T Finish 86 

040 SBK Single Block 87 

041 BDT Optional Block Skip 87 

042 DRN Dry Run 87 

043 MLK Machine Lock 87 

044 OPS Optional Stop 87 

045 ZNG Z Axis Cancel 88 

046 AFL Auxiliary Function Lock 88 

049 4NG 4th Axis Neglect 88 

050 +LX +X Axis OT 88 

051 -LX -X Axis OT 88 

052 +LY +Y Axis OT 88 

053 -LY -Y Axis OT 88 





054 +LZ +Z Axis OT 88 

055 -LZ -Z Axis OT 88 

056 +L4 +4th Axis OT 88 

057 -L4 -4th Axis OT 88 

059 INTLKX X Axis Interlock 89 

060 INTLKY Y Axis Interlock 89 

061 INTLKZ Z Axis Interlock 89 

062 INTLK4 4th Axis Interlock 89 

064 WINRW MLC Window Read/Write Signal 98 

065 WINREQ MLC Commanding Signal 98 

066 HIX X Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 89 

067 HIY Y Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 89 

068 HIZ Z Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 89 

069 HI4 4th Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 89 

075 SVAX X Axis Servo Alarm 90 

076 SVAY Y Axis Servo Alarm 90 

077 SVAZ Z Axis Servo Alarm 90 

078 SVA4 4th Axis Servo Alarm 90 

082 S1CW 1st Spindle CW 91 

083 S1CCW 1st Spindle CCW 91 

085 ORT Spindle Orientation 91 

086 SPPULF Spindle Command Type Changes to Pulse Type Under 91 

Spindle Orientation and Ridig Tapping Modes 

089 MRX X Axis Mirror Image 91 

090 MRY Y Axis Servo Alarm 91 

091 MRZ Z Axis Servo Alarm 91 

092 MR4 4th Axis Servo Alarm 91 

097 S1GR1 1st Spindle Gear #1 92 



100 UI0 MACRO Variable $200 92 




















119 ZP2ZDC ZP2Z Down Cancel 93 

120 PMCGO PMC Axis Go 94 

124 RTFIN Disable Sigal in Rigid Tapping 94 

125 RTST Enable Signal in Rigid Tapping 94 

126 SWEN Enable Signal of Spindle Motor Rotates in Gear-Shfiting 94 

Speed 

127 SWFIN Spindle Gear-Shifting Complete Signal 94 

134 PRTCLR Clear Working Piece Number 94 

140 2NDSLX 2nd +X Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

141 2NDSLX 2nd -X Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

142 2NDSLY 2nd +Y Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

143 2NDSLY 2nd -Y Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

144 2NDSLZ 2nd +Z Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

145 2NDSLZ 2nd -Y Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

146 2NDSL4 2nd +4th Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

147 2NDSL4 2nd -4th Axis Software Limit Choice 95 

201 AERSTX Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:X Axis 97 

202 AERSTY Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:Y Axis 97 

203 AERSTZ Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:Z Axis 97 

204 AERST4 Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:4th Axis 97 

207 AERDYX Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:X Axis 97 

208 AERDYY Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:Y Axis 97 

209 AERDYZ Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:Z Axis 97 

210 AERDY4 Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:4th Axis 97 

213 AEB0X Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : X Axis 97 

214 AEB0Y Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : Y Axis 97 

215 AEB0Z Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : Z Axis 97 

216 AEB04 Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : 4th Axis 97 

219 AEB1X Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: X Axis 98 

220 AEB1Y Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: Y Axis 98 

221 AEB1Z Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: Z Axis 98 

222 AEB14 Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: 4th Axis 98 




4.2 S Bits Definition 

S BIT CNC MLC 


000 STL Cycle Start Light 99 

001 SPL Feed Hold Light 99 

002 EDITL Edit Mode Light 99 

003 MEML MEM Mode Light 99 

004 MDIL MDI Mode Light 99 

005 JOGL JOG Mode Light 99 

006 INCJOG INC JOG Mode Light 99 

007 MPGL MPG Mode Light 99 

008 HOMEL Home Mode Light 99 

010 MREADY Preparation Completed 99 

011 MDIPRS MDI keyboard press signal 99 

016 ZP1X X 1st Axis Point Return End 100 

017 ZP1Y Y 1st Axis Point Return End 100 

018 ZP1Z Z 1st Axis Point Return End 100 

019 ZP14 4th 1st Axis Point Return End 100 

020 ZP2X X 2nd Axis Point Return End 100 

021 ZP2Y Y 2nd Axis Point Return End 100 

022 ZP2Z Z 2nd Axis Point Return End 100 

023 ZP24 4th 2nd Axis Point Return End 100 

028 WRN Warning 100 

029 MF M Code Read 100 

030 DEN Distribution EndAlarm 101 

031 AL Alarm 101 

032 RST Reset 101 

033 NCRDY NC Ready 101 

035 X1000 MPG x1000 Ratio Speeding 101 




039 PROGST Program Restart 101 

040 SBKL Single Block 101 

041 BDTL Optional Block Skip 101 

042 DRNL Dry Run 102 

043 MLKL Machine Lock 102 

044 OPSL Optional Stop 102 

045 RTL Rapid Traverse 102 

046 ZNGL Z-Axis Neglect 103 

047 AFLL Auxiliary Function Lock 103 

054 S1STB S Code Read 103 

061 SK2 Z-Axis Neglect 103 

062 SK3 MPG Dry Run 104 

063 SK4 Auxiliary Function Lock 104 





068 MPGDRN MPG Dry Run 105 

069 TSTB T Code Read 105 

071 SK6 Machine Lock 105 

072 SK7 Dry Run 106 

073 SK8 Optional Block Skip 106 

074 SK9 Optional Stop 107 

079 MLCFN MLC Window Finish 112 

080 M00 M00 Read 107 

081 M01 M01 Read 107 

082 M02 M02 Read 107 

083 M30 M30 Read 107 

086 ORTFIN Orientation Finish 107 

088 S1SA 1st Spindle Speed Arrival 108 

091 G80 Not in Canned Cycle Mode 108 

092 S1ZSA Spindle Zero Speed Arrival 108 

093 PLSCR Spindle Command Type Changes to Pulse Command in 108 

Spindle and Ridig Tapping Mode 

094 GRCAR Spindle Motor Speed when Gears are Switched 108 

100 UO0 MACRO Variable $600 108 












120 PMCFIN PMC Axis Finish 108 

128 RTMODE Riding Tapping Mode 109 

130 MOVX X Axis Moving 109 

131 MOVY Y Axis Moving 109 

132 MOVZ Z Axis Moving 109 

133 MOV4 4th Axis Moving 109 

134 WPARV Max Working Piece Arrival 110 

150 SGRC1 Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 1st Gear 111 

151 SGRC2 Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 2nd Gear 111 

152 SGRC3 Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 3rd Gear 111 

153 SGRC4 Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 4th Gear 111 

154 MOVDX X Axis Moving Direction 111 

155 MOVDX Y Axis Moving Direction 111 

156 MOVDX Z Axis Moving Direction 111 

157 MOVDX 4th Axis Moving Direction 111 







201 AETFX Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:X 111 

Axis 

202 AETFY Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:Y 111 

Axis 

203 AETFZ Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:Z 111 

Axis 

204 AETF4 Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:4th 111 

Axis 

207 AETFRX Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:X Axis 112 

208 AETFRY Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:Y Axis 112 

209 AETFRZ Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:Z Axis 112 

210 AETFR4 Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:4th Axis 112 

213 AERSTX Absolute Encoder Reset:X Axis 112 

214 AERSTY Absolute Encoder Reset:Y Axis 112 

215 AERSTZ Absolute Encoder Reset:Z Axis 112 

216 AERST4 Absolute Encoder Reset:4th Axis 112 




4.3 Register Definition 

REGISTER 


001 M_CODE M0~M99, M Code Command 113 

002 S_CODE S000~S9999, S Code Command 113 

003 T_CODE T000~T9999, T Code Command 113 

004 SPAS Spindle Actual Speed 113 

013 OPMDOE Mode Select 113 

014 INCFED MPG Ratio Select 113 

015 SPDOV Spindle Rotaing Mode Override 114 

016 FEEDOV ATC Mode Feedrate Override 115 

017 JOGOV JOG Mode Feedrate Override 116 

018 RTOV Rapid Traverse Mode Feedrate Override 117 

021 PMCF PMC Feedrate 117 

022 PMCC PMC Control 117 

024 PMCXMM PMC Function of X-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 118 

025 PMCXUM PMC Function of X-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 118 

026 PMCYMM PMC Function of Y-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 118 

027 PMCYUM PMC Function of Y-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 118 

028 PMCZMM PMC Function of Z-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 118 

029 PMCZUM PMC Function of Z-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 118 

030 PMC4MM PMC Function of 4th-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 118 

031 PMC4UM PMC Function of 4th-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 118 

040 OPMES1 MLC Alarm Message 118 






060 MLCFN MLC Windows Function for Item Code 119 

061 MLCSF1 MLC Windows Function for Sub Item Code 1 119 

062 MLCSF2 MLC Windows Function for Sub Item Code 2 119 

063 MLCD1 NC Overwrited MLC Window Function 1 119 















4.4 C Bits Description 

C Bit 000 

Description: 

Cycle Start 

Assumed the system is under MEM or MDI mode. When the signal changes from OFF to On, 

the system will be ready to be【Cycle Start】 condition. Meanwhile, the S BIT 000 signal will be 

set to ON in order to provide LADDER to enable work light ON function during machine 

running. On the other hand, assumed system is in【F-HOLD】 or 【B-STOP】 condition, the S 

BIT 000 will be set to OFF in order to provide LADDER to enable work light OFF function during 

machine stop. However, this signal will not be accepted by the system under the below three 

conditions: 

a. System is not under MEM or MDI mode. 

b. System is in 【NC NOT Ready】 or 【Cycle Start】 condition. 

c. System alarm occurs. 

C Bit 001 

Description: 

Feed Hold 

Assumed the system is in MEM or MDI mode and also in【NC Ready】 conditions. When this 

signal is ON, the system will be in 【F-HOLD】 condition. Meanwhile, the system will set S BIT 

000 signal to OFF in order to provide LADDER to enable work light OFF function during 

machine running. And also, to set S BIT 001 signal to ON in order to provide LADDER to 

enable work light ON function during machine stop. But, please notice that this signal is 

disabled (ineffective) for PMC axis function under JOG or RAPID mode. 

C Bit 003 

Description: 

Prog Protect 

When this signal is set to ON, part program editing is prohibited. 




C Bit 004 

Description: 

Manual Return 

Assumed NC is under MEM or MDI mode. If switching to JOG or MPG mode during program 

executing and also manual moves the machine away from the original program interrupting 

position, user can have the following two selections to continue the unfinished command: 

1. Manual Return: Moving the machine back to the original program interrupting position first 

and then to continue the unfinished commanding. 

2. Continue the unfinished commanding from the current position. But, there will be a 

OFFSET amount of coordinate. 

C Bit 006 

C Bit 007 

C Bit 008 

C Bit 009 

C Bit 010 

C Bit 011 

C Bit 012 

C Bit 013 

Description: 

+X Axis Direction 

-X Axis Direction 

+Y Axis Direction 

-Y Axis Direction 

+Z Axis Direction 

-Z Axis Direction 

+4 Axis Direction 

-4 Axis Direction 

These signals are selection commanding of system relative axis direction. There are three 

corresponding motions under each mode: 

a. JOG Mode: 

When axis direction signal is ON, the system will send out commanding signal to the 

designated axis direction in JOG speed until the signal is OFF. 

b. RAPID Mode: 

When axis direction signal is ON, the system will send out commanding signal to the 

designated axis direction in RAPID speed until the signal is OFF. 

c. HOME: 

When axis direction signal changes from OFF to ON, it starts moving back to HOME. 

C Bit 016 

C Bit 017 

C Bit 018 

C Bit 019 

Description: 

Handle X Axis 

Handle Y Axis 

Handle Z Axis 

Handle 4th Axis 

These signals are used under MPG mode, which are to indicate the present select servo axis. 

For example, if C BIT 016 signal is ON, it indicates that the present MPG axis direction is X 

axis. So, turning the MPG rotary switch will moving the servo axis toward X axis. 

HX:X Axis MPG Feed 

HY:Y Axis MPG Feed 

HZ:Z Axis MPG Feed 

H4:4 th Axis MPG Feed 

C Bit 020 

Description: 

MPG Dry Run 

Assumed the NC is in MEM or MDI mode. When this signal is ON, MPG is as feederate control. 

So, when operator uses MPG, the axis is moving in original feedrate, otherwise, stop. 

C Bit 021 

Wake up the screen saver signal 




Description: 

The signal which is used by MLC to notify system stopping screen saver and recount start-time. 

C Bit 023 

Description: 

Rapid 

Assumed NC is in JOG mode. If RT signal is ON, feedrate becomes rapidly speed, which is 

equal to RAPID mode. So, operator can apply the same principle in HOME mode. 

C Bit 031 

C Bit 032 

C Bit 033 

C Bit 034 

Description: 

X Axis Home DOG Signal 

Y Axis Home DOG Signal 

Z Axis Home DOG Signal 

4th Axis Home DOG Signal 

To notify NC the present HOME DOG signal. 

Remark: When Parameter # 0175 is 1 and when HOME DOG uses REMOTE key-in point, this 

signal is enabled. 




C Bit 036 

Description: 

Emergency Stop 

When this signal is ON, the system is in RESET condition and all motions stop, which means 

the system condition is NOT READY. 

C Bit 037 

Description: 

External Reset 

System outer RESET signal which is the same function as pressing RESET bottom. 

C Bit 038 

Description: 

M, S, T Finish 

Assumed NC is in the MEM or MDI mode. When the program executes M code interpretation, 

the content of M Code will be sent by REG 1. At the same time, it will send out M Code Read 

(MF)signal. 

When LADDER finishes executing the related M Code and replies it back to M,S,T Finish 

(FIN)signal, the signal will inform the system that the executing of M code is completed. 

Correct order is as following: 

M CODE INTERPREATION 

REG 

MF 

FIN 

a. When executing M77, 77 will be entered into REG 1. 

b. Assumed M Code and motion command are in the same BLOCK. If want M Code to 

execute its command after motion command is completed, then m code must coordinate 

with Distribution End(DEN)command under LADDER control. 

c. M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99 has no such simultaneous motion. 




C Bit 040 

Description: 

Single Block 

Assumed NC is in auto-executing condition of MEM mode. If this signal is ON, the system will 

stop after a BLOCK of program is finish executing. But, if STL signal in OFF and system 

condition is B_STOP, then NC will start executing the next BLOCK of program after Cycle Start 

(ST) signal is ON. 

C Bit 041 

Description: 

Optional Block Skip 

Assumed NC is in auto-executing of MEM mode. If there is a such symbol, “/”, in a program, 

any key-in after this symbol to EOB will be neglected. 

C Bit 042 

Description: 

Dry Run 

Assumed NC is in MEM or MDI mode. If this signal is ON, program will be executed under the 

below feedrates: 

G00:When RT is ON = RAPID feed. 

When RT is OFF =JOG feed. 

G01:JOG feed. 

C Bit 043 

Description: 

Machine Lock 

Assumed NC is under manual and auto modes, all moving command will NOT send to position 

control servo system. But, software interpolation value is still executed which means that 

program coordinate will still be renewed. 

C Bit 044 

Description: 

Optional Stop 

Assumed this signal is ON. If program executing reaches M01, system will be paused and STL 

signal is OFF. This implies that the system will continue executing programs after pressing 

Cycle Start (ST) bottom. 




C Bit 045 

Description: 

Z Axis Cancel 

Assumed NC is in manual and auto modes. If this signal is ON, Z axis will be locked, which 

means that Z axis moving command will NOT be sent to loop control servo system. But, Z axis 

software interpolation value is still executing. So, program coordinate will be renewed. 

C Bit 046 

Description: 

Auxiliary Function Lock 

Assumed this signal is ON. When M, S and T codes are executing, content code and reading 

signal are not sending out which means not to execute M, S and T simultaneously. 

C Bit 049 

Description: 

4th Axis Neglect 

When this signal is ON, the corresponding axis commanding will NOT be executed. 

For example: Enable 4 th axis neglect which means when executing part program G01 X10 Z10 

C10, C10 commanding will be neglected. 

C Bit 050 

C Bit 051 

C Bit 052 

C Bit 053 

C Bit 054 

C Bit 055 

C Bit 056 

C Bit 057 

Description: 

+X Axis OT 

-X Axis OT 

+Y Axis OT 

-Y Axis OT 

+Z Axis OT 

-Z Axis OT 

+4th Axis OT 

-4th Axis OT 

Each axis sends out the machine hardware-traveling signal in order to inform the system to 

display it. These C Bits are MLC travel limit signals for each axis. When these C BIT signals are 

on, the system alarm will be enabled. So the servo axis can only move toward the opposite 

direction. The following list is the definition for each C BIT: 

C BIT 

Definition 

50 X Axis +ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

51 X Axis -ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

52 Y Axis +ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

53 Y Axis -ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

54 Z Axis +ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

55 Z Axis -ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

56 4th Axis +ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

57 4th Axis -ive direction MLC Travel Limit 

X axis moving direction 

+X 

Enable C51 

Enable C50 

The following list is the warning message of MLC travel limit: 




WARNING ID 

Warning Message 

OP 6001 X AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6002 X AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 

OP 6003 Y AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6004 Y AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 

OP 6005 Z AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6006 Z AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 

OP 6007 4TH AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6008 4TH AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 

Warning/Alarm Cancel: 

After the above system warning message is enabled, need to wait until the servo moves toward 

the opposite direction. And also, the corresponding C BIT changes from ON to OFF, the 

warning message will be removed automatically. 

In JOG/RAPID or MPG mode, if the system warning message (OP 6001 〜 OP 6008) of MLC 

travel limit occurs, it is okay not to remove the warning message. Just moving directly to the 

reverse direction away from where the warning message occurs. After getting away from the 

software limitation range, the warning message will be removed. 

Under mode of MEM, MDI or HOME, if the system warning message (OP 6001 〜 OP 6008) of 

MLC travel limit occurs, OP will send out the warning message. In this case, users must press 

“RESET” to reset the system. 

ALARM ID 

OP 1020 

Warning Message 

OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT 

C Bit 059 

C Bit 060 

C Bit 061 

C Bit 062 

Description: 

X Axis Interlock 

Y Axis Interlock 

Z Axis Interlock 

4th Axis Interlock 

When the corresponding axis is ON, the axis will NOT move. But, the coordinate value will be 

renewed. 

C Bit 066 

C Bit 067 

C Bit 068 

C Bit 069 

Description: 

X Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 

Y Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 

Z Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 

4th Axis: Select Axis Direction Signal of Handle INT 

Assumed NC is under MEM mode. User can use Manual Handle Interrupt function to 




increase/decrease tool shifting amount in order to modify path. However, before using this 

function, user must set Handle Interrupt axis selection signal and MPG ratio (R REGISTER 

014). Then, user can use MPG to modify tool position. However, absolute coordinate will NOT 

be modified by Handle Interrupt, there will be a OFFSET amount of the initial program path and 

afterward tool path. This OFFSET amount will be cleared only by using manual reference point 

return. 

C Bit 075 

C Bit 076 

C Bit 077 

C Bit 078 

Description: 

X Axis Servo Alarm 

Y Axis Servo Alarm 

Z Axis Servo Alarm 

4th Axis Servo Alarm 

This signal will notify system if motor driver of any axis has any extraordinary phenomenon. 




C Bit 082 

C Bit 083 

Description: 

1st Spindle CW 

1st Spindle CCW 

When C bit of clockwise is ON, spindle rotates in clockwise direction. 

When C bit of counter-clockwise is ON, spindle rotates in counter-clockwise direction. 

If the above two are both OFF, spindle stops rotating. 

Note 1: The above C bits are enabled in normal spindle speed control mode, which is spindle 

clockwise, counter-clockwise and stop. 

Note 2: If the spindle CW and CCW are controlled by inventor’s CW and CCW connection point 

control, the above signals will only notify NC that the current spindle is in CW or CCW 

condition. 

C Bit 085 

Description: 

Spindle Orientation 

This signal will be enabled when spindle orientation is decided by encoder and in JOG mode. 

Please notice that if Parameter # 0019, 1055, 1056 are not set for orientation position, spindle 

will be re-orientated again. 

C Bit 086 

Description: 

Spindle Command Type Changes to Pulse Type Under Spindle Orientation 

and Ridig Tapping Modes 

Signal of Spindle is in orientation mode and also finishes orientating. 

C Bit 089 

C Bit 090 

C Bit 091 

C Bit 092 

Description: 

X Axis Mirror Image 

Y Axis Servo Alarm 

Z Axis Servo Alarm 

4th Axis Servo Alarm 

When mirror image signal is ON under Auto mode, this axis will be in reverse moving direction. 




C Bit 097 1st Spindle Gear #1 



Description: Setting the gear ratio between spindle motor and spindle. Every spindle provides 4sets of 

parameter # of gear ratio. The system default is to use the 4 th set of gear ratio. If user want to 

modify other sets of gear ratio, user can select the suitable gear ratio from each spindle’s 

corresponding gear ratio C bit. 

Spindle Gear C bit 

1 st 

Spindle 

2 nd 

Spindle 

3 rd 

Spindle 

1 C97=ON 

2 C98=ON 

3 C99=ON 

4 C97,98,99=OFF 

1 C116=ON 

2 C117=ON 

3 C118=ON 

4 C116,117,118=OFF 

1 C121=ON 

2 C122=ON 

3 C123=ON 

4 C121,122,123=OFF 

# of Motor 

Tooth 

Parameter # 

0049 

Parameter # 

0051 

Parameter # 

0178 

Parameter # 

0181 

Parameter # 

0664 

Parameter # 

0666 

Parameter # 

0668 

Parameter # 

0670 

Parameter # 

0672 

Parameter # 

0674 

Parameter # 

0676 

Parameter # 

0678 

# of Spindle 

Tooth 

Parameter # 

0050 

Parameter # 

0052 

Parameter # 

0179 

Parameter # 

0182 

Parameter # 

0665 

Parameter # 

0667 

Parameter # 

0669 

Parameter # 

0671 

Parameter # 

0673 

Parameter # 

0675 

Parameter # 

0677 

Parameter # 

0679 

C Bit 100 MACRO Variable $200 



















Description: These signals are the same as the MACRO system variables $120~$135. They provide input 

points of MACRO for LADDER. Example: If set UI0 to ON in LADDER, then $120 will be 1 in 

MACRO. These MACRO input point signals will provide order determination for MACRO. 

C Bit 119 

Description: 

ZP2Z Down Cancel 

When this signal is ON, the local Z axis motion will be inhibited after the 2 nd reference point. 

This signal is to protect tool exchanging and to prevent tool collusion after tool magazine moves 

toward left. 




C Bit 120 

Description: 

PMC Axis Go 

Setting this signal to ON in order to enable PMC axis moving command under the condition of 

JOG mode and when all PMC axis moving data are ready. 

C Bit 124 

Description: 

Disable Sigal in Rigid Tapping 

Milling disables rigid tapping. 

C Bit 125 

Description: 

Enable Signal in Rigid Tapping 

Rigid tapping (M29). When this signal is on, Z axis moving amount will follow the spindle 

encoder’s pulse amount. So user must use M28 to delete the signal when rigid tapping is done 

in order to prevent any wrong motion from the system. 

C Bit 126 

Description: 

Enable Signal of Spindle Motor Rotates in Gear-Shfiting Speed 

Milling spindle changes rotational speed. 

C Bit 127 

Description: 

Spindle Gear-Shifting Complete Signal 

Milling gear-shifting completed signal. 

C Bit 134 

Description: 

Clear Working Piece Number 

When NC reads M02, M30, the reading M code and parameter 89 are the same, NC will add 

the working piece by 1. If the working piece number is larger than or equal to that of the 

maximum working piece setting, NC will send out S134 to inform MLC to do the corresponding 

motion. When MLC sends out C 134, NC will clear the working piece number to zero. 




C Bit 140 

C Bit 141 

C Bit 142 

C Bit 143 

C Bit 144 

C Bit 145 

C Bit 146 

C Bit 147 

Description: 

2nd +X Axis Software Limit Choice 

2nd -X Axis Software Limit Choice 

2nd +Y Axis Software Limit Choice 

2nd -Y Axis Software Limit Choice 

2nd +Z Axis Software Limit Choice 

2nd -Y Axis Software Limit Choice 

2nd +4th Axis Software Limit Choice 

2nd -4th Axis Software Limit Choice 

1 st software limit: Using parameter 1006 ~ 1013 to set the limit. After executing zero return 

procedure, the parameter setting value will be enabled. The booting default 

value of +ive direction is 99999.999mm and the booting default value of –ive 

direction is -99999.999mm. 

2 nd software limit: Using parameter 1034 ~ 1041to set the limit. After executing zero return 

procedure, the parameter setting value will be enabled. The booting default 

value of +ive direction is 99999.999mm and the booting default value of –ive 

direction is -99999.999mm. 

The corresponding C BIT of each axis can exchange any value between the 1st software limit 

and the 2nd software limit. This means that only one set/combination can be enabled at tone 

time within the limit of the 1 st software limitation and the 2 nd software limitation. 

Software Limit 

C BIT 

X axis +ive direction C140: When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 

software limit 

When ON, using 2 nd software limit. 

X axis -ive direction C141: When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 



Y axis +ive direction C142: When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 



Y axis -ive direction C143:When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 



Z axis +ive direction C144:When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 



Z axis -ive direction C145:When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 



4th axis +ive direction C146:When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 



4th axis -ive direction C147:When OFF, use 1 st software limit; 



X axis Moving Range (C140 

X axis Moving Range 

(Para. # 0071 is 1、C129 is ON) 

X axis Moving Range(C140 OFF) 

X axis Moving Range 

(Para. # 0071 is 1、C129 is OFF) 

+X 

+ X axis 

1 st soft limit 

G22 travel limit: Able to designated the embedded travel checking range. For Internal and 

- X axis 

Direction G22 

+ X axis 

Direction G22 







C Bit 201 

C Bit 202 

C Bit 203 

C Bit 204 

Description: 

Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:X Axis 

Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:Y Axis 

Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:Z Axis 

Absolute encoder Reset Ready Signal:4th Axis 

When LADDER finishes absolute encoder zero return, this signal needs to be sent out to notify 

NC that. 

C Bit 207 

C Bit 208 

C Bit 209 

C Bit 210 

Description: 

Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:X Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:Y Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:Z Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Ready Signal:4th Axis 

LADDER will notify NC when driver enters into ABS transmitting mode and driver data are 

ready. 

C Bit 213 

C Bit 214 

C Bit 215 

C Bit 216 

Description: 

Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : X Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : Y Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : Z Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Bit 0Transmitting Signal : 4th Axis 

Assumed absolute encoder data reading is sent by serial transmitting. Also, assumed 2 bits of 

Encoder will be transmitted every time. So, when this bit is ON, it indicates that the signal of 

transmitting 2 bits data from driver to NC is 1. 




C Bit 219 

C Bit 220 

C Bit 221 

C Bit 222 

Description: 

Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: X Axis 

Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: Y Axis 

Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: Z Axis 

Absolute Encoder Bit 1 Transmit: 4th Axis 

Assumed absolute encoder data reading is sent by serial transmitting. Also, assumed 2 bits of 

Encoder will be transmitted every time. So, when this bit is ON, it indicates that the signal of 

transmitting 2 bits data from driver to NC is 1. 

C Bit 064 

C Bit 065 

Description: 

MLC Window Read/Write Signal 

MLC Commanding Signal 

Please refer to 4.7 MLC Window structure for a detailed description. 




4.5 S Bits Desctiption 

S Bit 000 

Description: 

Cycle Start Light 

When the system accepts to enable “CYCLE START” key and enters into automatic executing 

condition, this signal is ON, which means the system is in the “Cycle Start” condition. This 

signal is OFF when the automatic executing completed or the system is in ”FEED HOLD” 

condition. 

S Bit 001 

Description: 

Feed Hold Light 

When this signal is ON, it means the system is in ”FEED HOLD” condition. So the system is in 

“Machine Stop” condition. 

S Bit 002 

S Bit 003 

S Bit 004 

S Bit 005 

S Bit 006 

S Bit 007 

S Bit 008 

Description: 

Edit Mode Light 

MEM Mode Light 

MDI Mode Light 

JOG Mode Light 

INC JOG Mode Light 

MPG Mode Light 

Home Mode Light 

When these signals are ON, it means the system is in the relative operation mode condition. 

S Bit 010 

Description: 

Preparation Completed 

When these signals are ON, the system is in “Preparation Complete” condition. 

S Bit 011 

Description: 

MDI keyboard press signal 

1. The signal will be sent from system when pressing the bottom on MDI. 

2. The signal notify MLC to turn on LCD power and recount time to turn off LCD power. 




S Bit 016 

S Bit 017 

S Bit 018 

S Bit 019 

Description: 

X 1st Axis Point Return End 

Y 1st Axis Point Return End 

Z 1st Axis Point Return End 

4th 1st Axis Point Return End 

When these signals are ON, it means the system relative axis completed the zero return 

procedure and stop at the zero point. 

S Bit 020 X 2nd Axis Point Return End 

S Bit 021 Y 2nd Axis Point Return End 

S Bit 022 Z 2nd Axis Point Return End 

S Bit 023 4th 2nd Axis Point Return End 

Description: When these signals are ON, it means the system relative axis is completed the 2 nd (or the 3 rd , 

4 th ) reference return procedure and stop at the 2 nd (or 3 rd , 4 th ) reference point. 

S Bit 028 

Description: 

Warning 

When system warning occurs, this signal will notify PLC. After cause is eliminated, system 

warning is off automatically and this signal is OFF. 

S Bit 029 

Description: 

M Code Read 

When executing to the M code, this signal is “ON” in order to provide LADDER to do M code 

executing until FIN signal replies back. Please refer to the description of M code end signal (C 

BIT 038). 




S Bit 030 

Description: 

Distribution EndAlarm 

In MEM or MDI mode, when the moving command interpolation is completed, this signal will be 

sent out. So when M code and the moving G code are on the same BLOCK, please use this 

signal to control and to execute M code after moving G code. If do not use this signal, M code 

will be executed simultaneously with G code interpolation. 

S Bit 031 

Description: 

Alarm 

When the system alarm is on, this signal is ON. 

S Bit 032 

Description: 

Reset 

When the system receives the RESET command, this signal is ON. Remain one time scanning 

time in order for LADDER to reset. 

S Bit 033 

Description: 

NC Ready 

Assumed the controller’s power is on. After normally executing program, this signal will be ON. 

S Bit 035 

S Bit 036 

S Bit 037 

S Bit 038 

Description: 

MPG x1000 Ratio Speeding 




These four signals are used to indicate the current using MPG ratio. 

MPG Ratio S035 S036 S037 S038 

x1 0 1 0 0 

x10 0 0 1 0 

x100 0 0 0 1 

x1000 1 0 0 0 

S Bit 039 

Description: 

Program Restart 

When system enters the Program Restart process, the state signal of Program Restart will be 

enable(S39=ON), and will be disable when the system is completed or leave the operational 

status of Program Restart. 

S Bit 040 

Description: 

Single Block 

Conditional signal that is relative to single block (SBK). 

S Bit 041 

Description: 


Conditional signal that is relative to Optional Block Skip(BDT). 




S Bit 042 

Description: 

Dry Run 

Conditional signal that is relative to Dry Run (DRN). 

S Bit 043 

Description: 

Machine Lock 

Conditional signal that is relative to Machine Lock(MLK). 

S Bit 044 

Description: 

Optional Stop 

Conditional signal that is relative to Optional Stop(OPS). 

S Bit 045 

Description: 

Rapid Traverse 

Conditional signal that is relative to Rapid Traverse(RT). 




S Bit 046 

Description: 

Z-Axis Neglect 

Conditional signal that is relative to Z Axis Cancel(ZNG). 

S Bit 047 

Description: 


Conditional signal that is relative to Auxiliary Function Lock(AFL). 

S Bit 054 

Description: 

S Code Read 

When executing to S code, this signal is ON in order to provide LADDER to do S code 

executing until FIN signal is sending back. 

S Bit 061 

Description: 

Z-Axis Neglect 

ON/OFF control on the communication style software Panel will communicate with LADDER 

through this signal. For Z-AXIS NEGLECT key on the software Panel, ON/OFF control will 

communicate with LADDER through this signal. The timing procedure is as following: 

S061 

C045 

S046 




S Bit 062 

Description: 

MPG Dry Run 


through this signal. For MPG Dry Run key on the software Panel, ON/OFF control will 


S062 

C020 

S068 

S Bit 063 

Description: 



through this signal. For AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK key on the software Panel, ON/OFF 

control will communicate with LADDER through this signal. The timing procedure is as 

following: 

S063 

C046 

S047 




S Bit 068 

Description: 

MPG Dry Run 

Conditional signal that is relative to MPG Dry Run(MPGDRN). 

S Bit 069 

Description: 

T Code Read 

When executing to T code, this signal is ON in order to provide LADDTER to do T code 

executing until FIN signal is sending back. 

S Bit 071 

Description: 

Machine Lock 


through this signal. For Machine Lock key on the software Panel, ON/OFF control will 


S071 

C043 

S043 




S Bit 072 

Description: 

Dry Run 


through this signal. For Dry Run key on the software Panel, ON/OFF control will communicate 

with LADDER through this signal. The timing procedure is as following: 

S072 

C042 

S042 

S Bit 073 

Description: 



through this signal. For Optional Block Skip key on the software Panel, ON/OFF control will 


S073 

C041 

S041 




S Bit 074 

Description: 

Optional Stop 


through this signal. For Optional Stop key on the software Panel, ON/OFF control will 


S074 

C044 

S044 

S Bit 080 

S Bit 081 

S Bit 082 

S Bit 083 

Description: 

M00 Read 

M01 Read 

M02 Read 

M30 Read 

M00:after interpreting as M00, this signal is ON(remain one time scanning time) 




S Bit 086 

Description: 

Orientation Finish 

When spindle orientation is completed, this signal is ON. When PLC cancels the spindle 

orientation command (C85), this signal will become OFF. 




S Bit 088 

Description: 

1st Spindle Speed Arrival 

This signal is ON when the spindle speed arrives to its designated speed. Parameter 1054 is to 

set the error range of the spindle speed arrival. 

S Bit 091 

Description: 

Not in Canned Cycle Mode 

Assumed the system is in Canned Cycle mode. If this signal is OFF, effective G code of Group 

G09 is not 80. On the other hand, if the system is not under Canned Cycle mode and this signal 

is ON, then the effective G code of Group G09 is 80. 

S Bit 092 

Description: 

Spindle Zero Speed Arrival 

When the spindle rotational speed arrives to 0 rpm, the system will send out this signal and set 

the arrival speed to 20 rpm in advance. Also, able to use parameter No. 1063 to set the 

maximum speed when send out this signal. 

S Bit 093 

Description: 

Spindle Command Type Changes to Pulse Command in Spindle and Ridig 

Tapping Mode 

NC notifies MLC spindle to get ready to switch to the position control mode. Meanwhile, driver 

does the corresponding switch. 

S Bit 094 

Description: 

Spindle Motor Speed when Gears are Switched 

This signal will be sent out when spindle reaches gear-shifting speed. 

S Bit 100 MACRO Variable $600 












Description: These signals are the MACRO system variables $600~$615, which are MACRO outputs to 

LADDER point. Example: set $600 as 1 in MACRO, then UO0 will be ON in LADDER, which 

means that MACRO output signals will be used as external control for LADDER. 

S Bit 120 

Description: 

PMC Axis Finish 

This signal is ON when PMC axis moving is completed. 




S Bit 128 

Description: 

Riding Tapping Mode 

NC notifies MLC that whether or not NC is in rigid tapping mode. 

S Bit 130 

S Bit 131 

S Bit 132 

S Bit 133 

Description: 

X Axis Moving 

Y Axis Moving 

Z Axis Moving 

4th Axis Moving 

Moving condition of each axis: 

ON:Moving; 

OFF:Stop. 




S Bit 134 

Description: 

Max Working Piece Arrival 

When the number of working piece is greater than or equal to that of the maximum 

setting-working piece, S134 will be sent out to inform MLC. If setting the maximum working 

piece to zero, then this signal will not be sent out. MLC will use C134 to inform NC to clear 

working piece. 

Application Description: 

Enter into user parameter to do function selection and set parameter No. 12 as 1. When the 

working piece number reaches the setting working piece number, it will enter into the Feed Hole 

condition and send out warning message (Wrokpiece is full). 

At this time, user can do any needed motion. If there is no need to do any other motion, please 

press “Cycle Start” key directly. Then the working piece number will be cleared to zero 

automatically. Furthermore, it will start working automatically and counting working piece 

number from zero. If no need this function at all, then set parameter No.12 as 0. Circulating 

work of working piece will not be affected. 

01 Program Editing 0 11 Power Off Delay Time 5 

02 Home Point Search Priority 1 12 Work Piece Alarm 1 

03 Return Home Axis Priority 1 13 

04 Rapidly Moving 50% 0 14 

05 Total Number of Turret 0 15 

06 Safety Door 0 16 

07 Enforce Track Lubrication 0 17 

08 Lubricate ON Time 5 18 

09 Lubricate OFF Time 30 19 

10 Auto Power Off Function 1 20 




S Bit 150 

S Bit 151 

S Bit 152 

S Bit 153 

Description: 

Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 1st Gear 

Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 2nd Gear 

Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 3rd Gear 

Request Signal of Spindle Gear-Shifting: 4th Gear 

When S code is not below into the current gear range, System will use S Bit to notify PLC to 

execute gear shifting: 

S Bit 150:1 st spindle gear shifting signal; 

S Bit 151:2 nd spindle gear shifting signal; 

S Bit 152:3 rd spindle gear shifting signal; 

S Bit 153:4 th spindle gear shifting signal; 

At this time, spindle output voltage remains the same. 

S Bit 154 

S Bit 155 

S Bit 156 

S Bit 157 

S Bit 158 

S Bit 159 

Description: 

X Axis Moving Direction 

Y Axis Moving Direction 

Z Axis Moving Direction 

4th Axis Moving Direction 



These S BITs express the moving direction of each axis, when axis is at moving state. 

ON:positive direction 

OFF:negative direction 

S Bit 201 

S Bit 202 

S Bit 203 

S Bit 204 

Description: 

Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:X Axis 

Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:Y Axis 

Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:Z Axis 

Enter into Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting Mode:4th Axis 

To use this signal to notify servo driver to enter into ABS transmitting mode. 




S Bit 207 

S Bit 208 

S Bit 209 

S Bit 210 

Description: 

Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:X Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:Y Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:Z Axis 

Absolute Encoder Data Transmitting:4th Axis 

To use this signal to request ABS transmitting from servo driver. 

S Bit 213 

S Bit 214 

S Bit 215 

S Bit 216 

Description: 

Absolute Encoder Reset:X Axis 

Absolute Encoder Reset:Y Axis 

Absolute Encoder Reset:Z Axis 

Absolute Encoder Reset:4th Axis 

To use this signal to notify servo driver to eliminate absolute Encoder zero return motion. 

S Bit 079 

Description: 

MLC Window Finish 

Please refer to 4.7 MLC Window structure for a detailed description. 




4.6 Register Desctiption 

R Bit 001 

Description: 

M0~M99, M Code Command 

Executing M code will send the content of M code through this register. 

Range:00 ~ 99 

R Bit 002 

Description: 

R Bit 003 

Description: 

R Bit 004 

Description: 

R Bit 013 

Description: 

S000~S9999, S Code Command 

Executing S code will send the content of S code through this register. 

Range:0000 ~ 9999。 

T000~T9999, T Code Command 

Executing T code will send the content of T code through this register. 

Range:0000 ~ 9999. 

Spindle Actual Speed 

Actually rotational speed of spindle 

Mode Select 

The definition of operating-mode register is showed on table, 

Operating Mode REG 013 

EDIT 1 

MEM 2 

MDI 3 

JOG 

4 (C23=OFF) 

RAPID 4 (C23=ON ) 

INCJOG 5 

MPG 6 

HOME 7 

R Bit 014 

Description: 

MPG Ratio Select 

The definition of register of MPG amplification is showed on table, 

MPG amplification REG 014 

x1 

1(or others) 




x100 3 

R Bit 015 

Description: 

Spindle Rotaing Mode Override 

The definition of register of modulating spindle’s rotational speed is showed on table, 

% REG 015 

0% 0 

10% 1 

20% 2 

30% 3 

40% 4 

50% 5 

60% 6 

70% 7 

80% 8 

90% 9 

100% 10 

110% 11 

120% 12 

1% others 




R Bit 016 

Description: 

ATC Mode Feedrate Override 

The definition of register of modulating cutting-feedrate is showed on table, 

% REG 016 

0% 0 

10% 1 

20% 2 

30% 3 

40% 4 

50% 5 

60% 6 

70% 7 

80% 8 

90% 9 

100% 10 

110% 11 

120% 12 

130% 13 

140% 14 

150% 15 

160% 16 

170% 17 

180% 18 

190% 19 

200% 20 

‰ others 




R Bit 017 

Description: 

JOG Mode Feedrate Override 

The definition of register of modulating manual feedrate is showed on table, 

% REG 017 

0% 0 

10% 1 

20% 2 

30% 3 

40% 4 

50% 5 

60% 6 

70% 7 

80% 8 

90% 9 

100% 10 

110% 11 

120% 12 

130% 13 

140% 14 

150% 15 

160% 16 

170% 17 

180% 18 

190% 19 

200% 20 

‰ others 




R Bit 018 

Description: 

Rapid Traverse Mode Feedrate Override 

The definition of register of rapidly modulating feedrate, 

% REG 18 

F0% 0 

F0% 1 

25% 2 

50% 3 

100% 4 

1% others 

P.S:The actual rapid-feedrate is decided in parameter 0040 when REG18 is F0%. 

R Bit 021 

Description: 

PMC Feedrate 

Setting the feedrate of PMC axis. 

R Bit 022 

Description: 

PMC Control 

Setting PMC controlled axis. 

Bit 1,Bit 0:00 for G00,01 for G01,10 for G53 

Bit 2:1 for spindle 

Bit 3:Reserved 

Bit 4:1 for X axis 

Bit 5:1 for Y axis 

Bit 6:1 for Z axis 

Bit 7:1 for 4 th axis 




R Bit 024 

R Bit 025 

R Bit 026 

R Bit 027 

R Bit 028 

R Bit 029 

R Bit 030 

R Bit 031 

Description: 

PMC Function of X-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 

PMC Function of X-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 

PMC Function of Y-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 

PMC Function of Y-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 

PMC Function of Z-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 

PMC Function of Z-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 

PMC Function of 4th-Axis Command Amount, Unit=mm 

PMC Function of 4th-Axis Command Amount, Unit=um 

When setting PMC axis to execute moving command, the designated moving distance must be 

divided into two parts, which one is mm part and the other is um part, and be set into each 

register separately. 

R Bit 040 

R Bit 041 

R Bit 042 

R Bit 043 

R Bit 044 

R Bit 045 

Description: 

MLC Alarm Message 






The driver signal of alarm message provides MLC LADDER to send out alarm. There are six 

registers(word), and the sum of 96 messages can provide definitions and drivers. For 

example, LADDER must put a constant 5 into R40 with moving command(MOV). The strings 

of message must define at corresponding position in ENC_MLC.ERR simultaneously. In the 

same way, if setting R40 for zero, MLC ALARM will be cleaned. 




R Bit 060 MLC Windows Function for Item Code 

R Bit 061 MLC Windows Function for Sub Item Code 1 

R Bit 062 MLC Windows Function for Sub Item Code 2 

R Bit 063 NC Overwrited MLC Window Function 1 












Description: Please refer to 4.7 MLC Window structure for a detailed description. 




4.7 MLC Window Function 

After Ladder key-in the desired item codes in R60 〜 R62, setting C640 (0: read, 1 write). 

When completed, using C65 to inform NC. NC will enter the desired item into the 

corresponding R register (C64 is 0) according to the setting of R60 〜 R62 and C64. Or 

read the setting value (C64 is 1) from the corresponding R register. When completed the 

task, using S79 to inform Ladder. This function is enabled (raising edge trigger) when C65 

becomes 1 from 0; S79 will become OFF after C65 has become OFF. 

R register definition: 

R Register Definition Remarks 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

Item Code 

1:read absolute coordinate value; 

2:read machine coordinate value; 

3:read & write macro global variables; 

4:read parameter value; 

1:read only; 

2:read only; 

3:read & write。 

4:read only; 

Sub-Item Code 1 (different depends on R60) 

R60:3, means the starting numbers of macro global 

variables(1 ~ 500) that are read and wrote 

R60:4, the starting parameter #s that are read 

Sub-Item Code 2 (different depends on R60 and 

R61) 

Use R61 and R62 to order 

R60:3,means the desired read/write macro global read and write multiple 

variables’ numbers (starting from the number that is macro global variables 

designated by R61),maximum 8. 

continuously (max 8 

R60:4,means the desired read/write parameter variables),or the designated 

variables’ numbers(starting from the number that is parameter continuously 

designated by R61) ,maximum 8. 

Read/Write Value (different depends on R60~R62) 

R60:1,means X axis absolute coordinate mm part; 

R60:2,means X axis machine coordinate mm part; 

R60:3,means the present value of the1 st macro Please refer to Attention. 

global variable that is designated by R61 and R62. 

R60:4,means the value of 1 st parameter that is 

designated by R61 and R62. 


R60:1,means X axis absolute coordinate um part; 

R60:2,means X axis machine coordinate um part; 









65 

66 

67 

68 

69 


R60:1,means Y axis absolute coordinate mm part; 

R60:2,means Y axis machine coordinate mm part; 






R60:1,means Y axis absolute coordinate um part; 

R60:2,means Y axis machine coordinate um part; 

R60:3,means the present value of the1st macro Please refer to Attention. 


R60:4,means the value of 1st parameter that is 



R60:1,means Z axis absolute coordinate mm part; 

R60:2,means Z axis machine coordinate mm part; 






R60:1,means Z axis absolute coordinate um part; 

R60:2,means Z axis machine coordinate um part; 






R60:1,means 4th axis absolute coordinate mm 

part; 

R60:2,means 4th axis machine coordinate mm 

part; 

Please refer to Attention. 

R60:3,means the present value of the1st macro 


R60:4,means the value of 1st parameter that is 







R60:1,means 4th axis absolute coordinate um 

part; 

R60:2,means 4th axis machine coordinate um 

70 part; 

Please refer to Attention. 

R60:3,means the present value of the1 st macro 




Timing Prodecure Diagram: 

C064 1 

0 

C065 1 

0 

S079 1 

0 

MLC to R63~R76 Reading 

Attention: 

1. For read only items, if Ladder sets C64 to 1, NC will ignore it. Using the same principle 

for the writing items, if Ladder sets C64 to 0, NC will ignore it. 

2. Macro variables belong to DOUBLE type. But the present Ladder can only take care of 

the value in INT type. So if Ladder reads macro global variables via MLC Window, NC 

will check whether or not the macro global variable value is between -32768 ~ 32767. 

If yes, the macro global variables will change to INT type and then enter into the 

corresponding R register. If no, then the alarm 【 OP 1019 DESIRED MACRO 

VARIABLES OVER RANGE】will occur. 

3. Using R61 and R62, Ladder can read/write multiple macro global variables (maximum 

8 variables) continuously. Example: set R60 to 3, R61 to 200 and R62 to 5. When C64 

is OFF, it means the total current value of the designated reading/writing @200 ~ 

@204, total 5 macro global variables. But, if (R61 + R62 – 1) > 500, then alarm 

message【OP 1018 DESIRED MACRO GLOBAL VARIABLES NOT EXISTED】will 

occur. 

4. Macro local variables not able to execute read and write via MLC Window. 

5. The reading parameter value must be an integrate number (INT) or long integrate 




number (LONG). But the present Ladder can only take care of the values in INT type. 

So if Ladder reads parameter value via MLC Window, NC will check whether or not 

that parameter value is between -32768 ~ 32767. If yes, the parameter will change to 

INT type, and then enter into the corresponding R register. If not, the alarm message 

【OP 1022 DESIRED PARAMETER VARIABLES OVER RANGE】 will occur. 

6. Using R61 and R62, Ladder can read/write multiple parameter variables (maximum 8 

variables) continuously. Example: set R60 to 3, R61 to 200 and R62 to 5. When C64 is 

OFF, it means the total value of the reading parameter variables 0200 ~ 0204, total 5 

parameter variables. If it is over the valid parameter range, the alarm message【OP 

1023 DESIRED PARAMETER VARIABLES NOT EXISTED】will occur. 

Valid parameter variable range: 0 ~ 220,300 ~ 899,1000 ~ 1200。 

7. Parameter is not able to execute setting via MLC Window. 

Alarm Message: 

1. OP 1018:DESIRED MACRO GLOBAL VARIABLES NOT EXISTED. 

2. OP 1019: DESIRED MACRO VARIABLES OVER RANGE 

3. OP 1022:DESIRED PARAMETER VARIABLES OVER RANGE 

4. OP 1023: DESIRED PARAMETER VARIABLES NOT EXISTED 




4.8 MLC Initial Setting Description(PLCIO.CFG) 

In LNCMILL\MACHINE, file name is PLCIO.CFG, this file is to set MLC I/O configuration 

and definition, file content is as following: 

InputSignalInverse=0 // I point is reverse turning, 0=No , 1=Yes 

OutputSignalInverse=0 // O point is reverse turning, 0=No , 1=Yes 

BaseAddress=0x200 // pcc1620 base address 

Set1Slave1=1 

// whether to use Set1’s Slave1, 0=No, 1=Yes 

Set1Slave2=0 


Set2Slave1=1 


Set2Slave2=0 


I 0 1 0x200 // column [I or O][NUMBER][SET][ADDRESS][able to add footnot] 

I 8 1 0x201 // no empty space in between 

I 16 1 0x202 // I or i is okay 

I 24 1 0x203 // O or o is okay 

I 32 1 0x204 // SET=1means SET1, SET=2 means SET2 

I 40 2 0x200 // must starts from I0 

O 0 1 0x200 // due to EPCIO factor, O point must be set as even number. 

O 16 1 0x202 

O 32 2 0x200 

O 48 2 0x202 

(Note)I 0 1 0x200 

Means the corresponding hardware address (the following explains how to set) 

I0 ~ I15 to hardware SET1 

means LADDER configures from I0 ~ I15 




PCC1620 

DC24V 

SIO1520 

208H ~ 20CH : Input 

208H ~ 20BH : Output 

SIO1520 

SIO1530 

20DH ~ 20FH : Input 

20CH ~ 20FH : Output 

200H ~ 204H : Input 

200H ~ 203H : Output 

SIO1530 

205H ~ 207H : Input 

204H ~ 207H : Output 

Due to user option I/O board and different connection methods, need to define on different 

I/O address. For the above diagram, due to connect to RIO1, the I/O address must be 

defined to SET 1. 



Parameter 

5 Parameter 

Parameters seprated into 7 types: servo parameter, machine parameter, spindle parameter, 

MPG parameter, compensation parameter, original parameter, and operation parameter. 

Note: 

1. Four effective times due to different parameter setting values. 

a:Effective immediately 

b:Effective after RESET(R) 

c:Effective after rebooting(⊙) 

d:Effective after re-power on(ㄣ) 

2. Two types of authorization status according to each parameter’s functions. However, 

under 【End-User】status, some parameter will NOT occur: 

a:End-user 

b:Machine maker 

3. Some parameters use Bit method to set whether or not to enable a certain function. 

Usually, Bit0 corresponds X axis, Bit1 corresponds Y axis, Bit2 corresponds Z axis. 

The setting method is as below: 

Bit0:1 means 1 in 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 and so on 

Bit1:1 means 2 in 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 and so on; 




So, if want to set a certain Bit to 1, only need to adding up the corresponding value 

into the parameter. For example, if want to set both Bit1 and Bit3 to 1, the setting 

value of this parameter is 10(2 + 8). 



Parameter 

5.1 Parameter List 

No Group Description Active Level Pagination 

2 Servo MAX FOLLOWING ERROR X AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

152 

3 Servo MAX FOLLOWING ERROR Y AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

152 

4 Servo MAX FOLLOWING ERROR Z AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

152 

5 Servo MAX FOLLOWING ERROR 4TH AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

152 

6 Servo X IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND R 

Machinery 

Builder 

153 

7 Servo Y IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND R 

Machinery 

Builder 

153 

8 Servo Z IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND R 

Machinery 

Builder 

153 

9 Servo 4TH IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND R 

Machinery 

Builder 

153 

10 Servo G00 X ACC/DEC TIME ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

154 

11 Servo G00 Y ACC/DEC TIME ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

154 

12 Servo G00 Z ACC/DEC TIME ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

154 

13 Servo G00 4TH ACC/DEC TIME ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

154 

14 Servo G01 ACC/DEC TIME ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

155 

15 

HandW 

Machinery 

AXIS.HANDLE FOR MPG DRY RUN ⊙ 

heel 

Builder 

201 

16 Spindle ACC/DEC TIME OF 1ST SPINDLE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

173 

18 

HandW 

Machinery 

MPG MULTIPLIER MODE 

R 

heel 

Builder 

201 

19 

Zero 

Machinery 

WAY TO DEAL HOMING ON DOG R 

Return 

Builder 

213 

20 

Zero DEFAULT OF RETURN HOME Machinery 

⊙ 

Return FN.(BIT) 

Builder 

213 

21 Spindle 1ST SPD ORIENTATION RPM R 

Machinery 

Builder 

173 

24 Servo CHANNEL NO FOR X AXIS ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

155 

25 Servo CHANNEL NO FOR Y AXIS ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

155 

26 Servo CHANNEL NO FOR Z AXIS ⊙ Machinery 155 



Parameter 


Builder 

27 Servo CHANNEL NO FOR 4 AXIS ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

155 

28 

HandW 

Machinery 

MPG X PORT 

⊙ 

heel 

Builder 

202 

29 Spindle CORRESPONDING TO 1ST SPINDLE ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

174 

30 

Zero 

Machinery 

OFFSET LENGTH OF X.ORG 

R 

Return 

Builder 

213 

31 

Zero 

Machinery 

OFFSET LENGTH OF Y.ORG 

R 

Return 

Builder 

213 

32 

Zero 

Machinery 

OFFSET LENGTH OF Z.ORG 

R 

Return 

Builder 

213 

33 

Zero 

Machinery 

OFFSET LENGTH OF 4.ORG 

R 

Return 

Builder 

213 

34 

Zero 

Machinery 

PAUSE TIME.X HOME SERACHING R 

Return 

Builder 

214 

35 

Zero 

Machinery 

PAUSE TIME.Y HOME SERACHING R 

Return 

Builder 

214 

36 

Zero 

Machinery 

PAUSE TIME.Z HOME SERACHING R 

Return 

Builder 

214 

37 

Zero 

Machinery 

PAUSE TIME.4 HOME SERACHING R 

Return 

Builder 

214 

38 

Compe 

nsation BACKLASH/PITCH COMP UNITS ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

203 

39 

Operati 

on 

G92 IS CANCELLED AT G54~G59 R User 227 

40 Servo MIN.F OVERRIDE VALUE FOR G00 R User 156 

41 

Operati 

on 

G00 LINEAR INTERPOLATION R User 228 

42 

Operati 

on 

COMMENT TYPE 0:/*...*/ 1:(...) R User 228 

43 

Operati 

on 

FLAG OF EXACT CHECK R User 229 

44 

Compe 

nsation X BACKLASH R Machinery 

Builder 

203 

45 

Compe 

nsation Y BACKLASH R Machinery 

Builder 

203 

46 

Compe 

nsation Z BACKLASH R Machinery 

Builder 

203 

47 

Compe 

nsation 4TH BACKLASH R Machinery 

Builder 

203 

48 

Zero 

Machinery 

DIRECT SET HOME POSITION ⊙ 

Return 

Builder 

214 

NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.1M Machinery 

49 Spindle ⊙ 

GEAR 

Builder 

174 

50 Spindle NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.1A GEAR ⊙ Machinery 175 



Parameter 


Builder 

NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.2M Machinery 


GEAR 

Builder 

175 

52 Spindle NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.2A GEAR ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

176 

53 Servo FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.4TH ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

156 

54 Servo FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.X ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

156 

55 Servo FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.Y ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

156 

56 Servo FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.Z ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

156 

57 Spindle 1ST SPINDLE FEEDBACK MULTIPLY ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

176 

62 

Machin 

Machinery 

UNITS OF #104~#107 PARAMS ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

63 

Operati 

on 

COORD.RLT SET WITH COORD.ABS R User 229 

64 

Zero 

Machinery 

HOME DOG 0)NC 1)NO 

⊙ 

Return 

Builder 

215 

65 Servo ABSOLUTE ENCODER (BIT) ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

157 

66 Servo 4TH AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

158 

68 

Machin 

Machinery 

DENOMINATOR OF GEAR RATIO.X ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

69 

Machin 

Machinery 

DENOMINATOR OF GEAR RATIO.Y ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

70 

Machin 

Machinery 

DENOMINATOR OF GEAR RATIO.Z ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

71 

Operati 

on 

INNER/OUTTER CHECK OF G22 R User 230 

72 

Machin 

Machinery 

DENOMINATOR GEAR RATIO.4 ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

73 

Operati 

Machinery 

ENABLE G31 ACCELERATION ⊙ 

on 

Builder 

230 

74 

Operati ENABLE MACRO TRACE UNDER 

on SBK 

R User 230 

75 

HandW 

Machinery 

MPG 4TH PORT 

⊙ 

heel 

Builder 

202 

76 

Zero 

Machinery 

ENABLE ABS SET AFTER HOMING R 

Return 

Builder 

215 

77 

Zero 

Return 

ENABLE NONE HOMING G00 OPR R User 216 

78 

Operati 

on 

ENABLE C AXIS TANGENT FOLLOW ⊙ User 231 



Parameter 


79 

Zero 

Machinery 

ORG.X AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG R 

Return 

Builder 

216 

80 

Zero 

Machinery 

ORG.Y AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG R 

Return 

Builder 

216 

81 

Zero 

Machinery 

ORG.Z AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG R 

Return 

Builder 

216 

82 

Zero 

Machinery 

ORG.4 AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG R 

Return 

Builder 

216 

83 

Operati 

on 

ENABLE G00 UNDER DRY RUN R User 231 

84 Spindle 1ST SPD ORIENT 0)SENSOR 1)ENC. R 

Machinery 

Builder 

177 

85 Servo 

MAX FOLLOWING ERROR X100 Machinery 

R 

(BIT) 

Builder 

158 

87 

HandW 

Machinery 

MPG Y PORT 

⊙ 

heel 

Builder 

202 

88 

HandW 

Machinery 

MPG Z PORT 

⊙ 

heel 

Builder 

202 

89 

Operati 

on 

M CODE ID OF PART COUNTER R User 231 

90 Spindle 1ST SPINDLE RPM DISPLAY TYPE 

Machinery 

Builder 

178 

94 

Operati 

Machinery 

EDIT FILE O9XXX 0)N 1)Y 

on 

Builder 

232 

95 Spindle MIN SPEED OF 1RD SPINDLE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

179 

98 Spindle OFFSET VALUE OF 1ST SPINDLE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

180 

100 

Machin 

Machinery 

NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.X ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

101 

Machin 

Machinery 

NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.Y ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

102 

Machin 

Machinery 

NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.Z ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

103 

Machin 

Machinery 

NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.4 ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

104 

Machin 

Machinery 

SCREW PITCH.X 

⊙ 

e 

Builder 

172 

105 

Machin 

Machinery 

SCREW PITCH.Y 

⊙ 

e 

Builder 

172 

106 

Machin 

Machinery 

SCREW PITCH.Z 

⊙ 

e 

Builder 

172 

107 

Machin 

Machinery 

SCREW PITCH.4 

⊙ 

e 

Builder 

172 

108 Servo MORTOR GAINS.X ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

159 

109 Servo MORTOR GAINS.Y ⊙ Machinery 159 



Parameter 


Builder 

110 Servo MORTOR GAINS.Z ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

159 

111 Servo MORTOR GAINS.4TH ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

159 

112 

Compe 

nsation NUM.SECS OF X.PICTH COMP ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

204 

113 

Compe 

nsation NUM.SECS OF Y.PICTH COMP ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

204 

114 

Compe 

nsation NUM.SECS OF Z.PICTH COMP ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

204 

115 

Compe 

nsation NUM.SECS OF 4TH.PICTH COMP ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

204 

116 Servo MOVING DIR OF SERVO AXES(BIT) ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

160 

117 

Compe 

nsation ENABLE OF BACKLASH COMP(BIT) R Machinery 

Builder 

204 

118 

Compe 

nsation FLAG OF BACKLASH DIRECTION ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

204 

119 

Compe 

nsation ENABLE FLAG OF PITCH COMP ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

205 

120 

Zero 

Machinery 

HOME DIRECTION OF AXIS 

⊙ 

Return 

Builder 

217 

121 

Operati 

on 

ESCAPE DIRECTION OF G76/G87 R User 232 

122 

Operati 

Machinery 

NAME OF AXIX.4 

⊙ 

on 

Builder 

233 

123 

Operati 

on 

POWER ON METRIC/INCH SYSTEM ⊙ User 233 

124 

Operati 

on 

POWER ON G00/G01 DEFAULT ⊙ User 233 

129 

Operati 

on 

G02 G03 ARC ERROR RANGE R User 233 

130 

Operati AUTO CONTROL OF NUM 

on PRECISION 

R User 234 

131 

Operati 

Machinery 

COMPENSATION STARTING TYPE R 

on 

Builder 

234 

134 

Operati 

on 

G83/G87 EXTRACT 0)ESCAPE 1)R R User 234 

135 

Operati 

on 

DEFAULTS OF G90/G91 ⊙ User 235 

136 

Operati 

on 

X SCALING IS EFFECTIVE OR NOT R User 235 

137 

Operati 

on 

Y SCALING IS EFFECTIVE OR NOT R User 235 

138 

Operati 

on 

Z SCALING IS EFFECTIVE OR NOT R User 235 



Parameter 


139 

Operati 

on 

RADIUS COMP SYMBOL SET R User 235 

140 

Operati DISABLE RESET COMMON VAR 

on CLR 

R User 236 

141 

Operati 

on 

DISABLE RESET GLOBAL VAR CLR R User 236 

142 

Operati 

on 

ABS/RLT ROTATION COMMAND R User 236 

143 

Operati 

on 

CODE FOR SCALING R User 236 

145 

Operati 

Machinery 

DEFALTS OF PLANE XY/ZX/YZ ⊙ 

on 

Builder 

237 

146 

Operati 

Machinery 

M CODE CALLING MACRO O9001 R 

on 

Builder 

237 

147 

Operati 

Machinery 


on 

Builder 

237 

148 

Operati 

Machinery 


on 

Builder 

237 

149 

Operati 

on 

DEFAULTS VAL OF FEEDRATE ⊙ User 237 

150 

Operati CLEANCE VALUE OF DEEP 

on DRILLING 

R User 238 

152 

Operati 

on 

4TH AXIS OPTIMAL R User 238 

155 

Operati 

on 

FEEDRATE IS MM/REV OR MM/MIN ⊙ User 239 

156 Servo CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF X ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

161 

157 Servo CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF Y ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

161 

158 Servo CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF Z ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

161 

159 Servo CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF 4 ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

161 

161 

Operati 

Machinery 


on 

Builder 

239 

162 

Operati 

Machinery 


on 

Builder 

239 

163 

Operati 

Machinery 


on 

Builder 

239 

164 

Operati 

Machinery 


on 

Builder 

239 

165 

Operati 

Machinery 


on 

Builder 

239 

166 

Operati 

Machinery 

G CODE CALLING MACRO O9010 R 

on 

Builder 

239 

167 Operati G CODE CALLING MACRO O9011 R Machinery 239 



Parameter 


168 

169 

170 

on 

Operati 

on 

Operati 

on 

Operati 

on 

G CODE CALLING MACRO O9012 

MACRO O9020 CALLED BY T 

CODES 

MODAL UPDATE AFTER MDI TO 

MEM 

171 Spindle FEEDBACK DIR. OF SPINDLES(BIT) ⊙ 

172 Servo G00 ACC. TYPE 0)LINE 1)S CURVE ⊙ 

173 Servo G01 ACC. TYPE 0)LINE 1)S CURVE ⊙ 

175 

176 

177 

Zero 

Return 

Operati 

on 

Operati 

on 

178 Spindle 

HOME DOG FROM 0)LOCAL 

1)REMOTE 

LOCAL PORT NO FOR G31 

CONTACT TYPE OF G31 

NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.3M 

GEAR 


180 

Operati 

on 

181 Spindle 

R 

R 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

239 

239 

R User 240 

⊙ 

R 

R 

⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

182 

161 

163 

218 

240 

241 

183 

183 

ENABLE MANUAL RETURN R User 241 

NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.4M 

GEAR 


183 Spindle 1ST SPD VLOCITY COMMAND TYPE ⊙ 

184 Spindle 1ST SPD ORT. LOCAL INPUT SET R 

185 Servo 

187 

Operati 

on 

FEEDBACK DIR OF SERVO 

AXES(BIT) 

⊙ 

⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

183 

184 

184 

185 

164 

FEED RATE CLAMPING R User 242 

188 Servo 

POSITION LOOP GAN OF EACH Machinery 

R 

AXIS 

Builder 

164 

189 Spindle 1ST SPD INITIAL SPEED ⊙ User 186 

1ST SPD POSITION COMMAND Machinery 

190 Spindle R 

TYPE 

Builder 

186 

191 Servo ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.X ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

164 

192 Servo ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.Y ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

164 



Parameter 


193 Servo ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.Z ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

164 

194 Servo ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.4TH ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

164 

195 Spindle ENCODER TYPE OF 1ST SPINDLE ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

187 

200 

Operati 

on 

FEEDRAT SHOW 0)CMD 1)ACTUAL R User 243 

202 

Operati 

on 

ENG/CHI/SIM LANG SETTING ⊙ User 243 

204 

Zero 

Machinery 

HOME POSITION RECORD BIT R 

Return 

Builder 

218 

205 

Operati 

on 

REL/ABS COMP VALUE R User 243 

208 

Zero REFERENCE MARKS OF LINEAR Machinery 

⊙ 

Return SCALE 

Builder 

219 

209 

Zero HOME RETURN FOR LINEAR Machinery 

R 

Return SCALE 

Builder 

219 

210 

Zero 

Machinery 

HOME POINT FOR LINEAR SCALE R 

Return 

Builder 

220 

211 

Operati 

on 

M CODE TO STOP INTERPRETER R User 244 

212 

Operati 

on 


213 

Operati 

on 


214 

Operati 

on 


215 

Operati 

on 


216 

Operati 

on 


217 

Operati 

on 


218 

Operati 

on 


219 

Operati 

on 


220 

Operati 

on 


221 

Operati 

Machinery 

DIGITAL FILITER FREQUECNY ⊙ 

on 

Builder 

244 

223 

Operati 

Machinery 

AXES MANUAL RETURN(BIT) 

R 

on 

Builder 

245 

224 Spindle 2ND SPD SPEED CHK 0)ACT 1)CMD R 

Machinery 

Builder 

189 

225 Spindle 3RD SPD SPEED CHK 0)ACT 1)CMD R Machinery 189 



Parameter 


Builder 

226 Spindle MOVING DIR. OF SPINDLES(BIT) ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

187 

231 

Operati 

Machinery 

AXIS X INFORMATION HIDE 

on 

Builder 

245 

232 

Operati 

Machinery 

AXIS Y INFORMATION HIDE 

on 

Builder 

245 

233 

Operati 

Machinery 

AXIS Z INFORMATION HIDE 

on 

Builder 

245 

234 

Operati 

Machinery 

AXIS 4TH INFORMATION HIDE 

on 

Builder 

245 

1ST SPD POS GAIN AT Machinery 

240 Spindle R 

ORIENTATION 

Builder 

187 

241 Spindle 1ST SPD POS GAIN AT RIGID TAP R 

Machinery 

Builder 

187 

248 Spindle 1ST SPD ORIENT OFFSET UNIT ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

188 

249 

Operati 

Machinery 

RAMDISK ERR MSG 0)OFF 1)ON ⊙ 

on 

Builder 

246 

272 

Machin 

Machinery 

NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.5 ⊙ 

e 

Builder 

171 

292 

Operati 

on 

ENABLE C AXIS PATH FOLLOWING ⊙ User 231 

293 

Zero 

Machinery 

ZRN BY DOG OR INDEX 

⊙ 

Return 

Builder 

220 

CORRESPONDING TO 2ND Machinery 


SPINDLE 

Builder 

174 

CORRESPONDING TO 3RD Machinery 


SPINDLE 

Builder 

174 

2ND SPD VLOCITY COMMAND Machinery 


TYPE 

Builder 

184 

3RD SPD VLOCITY COMMAND Machinery 


TYPE 

Builder 

184 

298 Spindle 2ND SPD.SPEED ARRIVAL RANGE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

189 

299 Spindle 2RD SPINDLE ZERO SPEED RANGE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

192 

300 

Compe 

nsation PITCH X COMP.001 R Machinery 

Builder 

205 

349 

Compe 


Builder 

205 

350 

Operati JOG FRATE REF TO MDI F 

on COMMAND 

R User 246 

351 

Operati 

Machinery 

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE UNIT 

⊙ 

on 

Builder 

246 

352 

Operati 

Machinery 

JOG OVERRIDE UNIT 

⊙ 

on 

Builder 

247 



Parameter 


353 

Operati 

Machinery 

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE UNIT ⊙ 

on 

Builder 

247 

354 Spindle 1ST SPD OVERRIDE UNIT ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

188 

355 Spindle 2ND SPD OVERRIDE UNIT ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

188 

356 Spindle 3RD SPD OVERRIDE UNIT ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

188 

358 

Compe 

nsation ENABLE THERMO DEFORMED CMP ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

205 

359 

Compe ALLOWANCE OF THERMO CMP Machinery 

nsation INPUT 

Builder 

206 

360 

Operati 

on 

OPTION COLOR SET(0~3) ⊙ User 247 

361 

Operati 

on 

BLACK COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

362 

Operati 

on 

BLUE COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

363 

Operati 

on 

GREEN COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

364 

Operati 

on 

CYAN COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

365 

Operati 

on 

RED COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

366 

Operati 

on 

MAGENTA COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

367 

Operati 

on 

BROWN COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

368 

Operati 

on 

WHITE COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

369 

Operati 

on 

GRAY COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

370 

Operati 

on 

LIGHTBLUE COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

371 

Operati 

on 

LIGHTGREEN COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

372 

Operati 

on 

LIGHTCYAN COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

373 

Operati 

on 

LIGHTRED COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

374 

Operati 

on 

LIGHTMAGENTA COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

375 

Operati 

on 

YELLOW COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

376 

Operati 

on 

LIGHTWHITE COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

377 Operati CURSOR COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 



Parameter 


378 

379 

380 

on 

Operati 

on 

Operati 

on 

Operati 

on 

MARK COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

UP EDGE COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

DOWN EDGE COLOR SET(0~16) ⊙ User 248 

393 Spindle 1ST SPINDEL GEARING METHOD ⊙ 

394 

450 

499 

600 

649 

650 

Machinery 

Builder 

Operati 

on 

THE SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME ⊙ User 248 

Compe 

nsation PITCH Y COMP.001 R Machinery 

Builder 

206 

Compe 


Builder 

206 

Compe 

nsation PITCH Z COMP.001 R Machinery 

Builder 

207 

Compe 


Builder 

207 

Operati SET THE METHOD OF PROGRAM 

on RESTART 

User 249 

663 Spindle 1ST SPD ORIENT ACC/DEC TIME ⊙ 

NUMBER OF 2ND SPINDLE.1M 

664 Spindle 

GEAR 

NUMBER OF 2ND SPINDLE.1A 

665 Spindle 

GEAR 


666 Spindle 

GEAR 


667 Spindle 

GEAR 


668 Spindle 

GEAR 


669 Spindle 

GEAR 


670 Spindle 

GEAR 


671 Spindle 

GEAR 

NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.1M 

672 Spindle 

GEAR 

NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.1A 

673 Spindle 

GEAR 

NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.2M 

674 Spindle 

GEAR 

NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.2A 

675 Spindle 

GEAR 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

188 

189 

174 

175 

175 

176 

183 

183 

183 

184 

174 

175 

175 

176 



Parameter 


NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.3M Machinery 


GEAR 

Builder 

183 

NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.3A Machinery 


GEAR 

Builder 

183 

NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.4M Machinery 


GEAR 

Builder 

183 

NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.4A Machinery 


GEAR 

Builder 

184 

750 

Compe 

nsation PITCH A COMP.001 R Machinery 

Builder 

207 

799 

Compe 


Builder 

207 

800 Servo RANGE.X FOR EXACT REACH R 

Machinery 

Builder 

166 

801 Servo RANGE.Y FOR EXACT REACH R 

Machinery 

Builder 

166 

802 Servo RANGE.Z FOR EXACT REACH R 

Machinery 

Builder 

166 

803 Servo RANGE.4TH FOR EXACT REACH R 

Machinery 

Builder 

166 

806 

Operati 

on 

MAX ALLOWANCE ERROR IN TURN R User 249 

808 

Operati 

on 

ENABLE CORNNER ACC CONTROL R User 249 

809 

Operati 

on 

MAX CIRCULAR ALLOWANCE ERR R User 249 

810 

Operati 

on 

SET RIGID TAP IN G101~G105 R User 250 

811 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE CMP G CODE 0)G2 G3 1)ALL R Machinery 

Builder 

208 

812 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +X CMP VALUE R Machinery 

Builder 

208 

813 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +X CMP TIME R Machinery 

Builder 

209 

814 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +X CMP DELAY R Machinery 

Builder 

209 

815 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -X CMP VALUE R Machinery 

Builder 

210 

816 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -X CMP TIME R Machinery 

Builder 

210 

817 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -X CMP DELAY R Machinery 

Builder 

211 

818 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +Y CMP VALUE R Machinery 

Builder 

208 

819 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +Y CMP TIME R Machinery 

Builder 

209 

820 Compe SPIKE +Y CMP DELAY R Machinery 209 



Parameter 


nsation 

Builder 

825 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -Y CMP VALUE R Machinery 

Builder 

210 

826 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -Y CMP TIME R Machinery 

Builder 

210 

827 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -Y CMP DELAY R Machinery 

Builder 

211 

828 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +Z CMP VALUE R Machinery 

Builder 

208 

829 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +Z CMP TIME R Machinery 

Builder 

209 

830 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE +Z CMP DELAY R Machinery 

Builder 

209 

831 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -Z CMP VALUE R Machinery 

Builder 

210 

832 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -Z CMP TIME R Machinery 

Builder 

210 

833 

Compe 

nsation SPIKE -Z CMP DELAY R Machinery 

Builder 

211 

834 

Zero 

Machinery 

ABS. ENCODER READ TIME 

R 

Return 

Builder 

221 

1ST SPD ORIENT CHECK Machinery 

839 Spindle R 

TOLERANCE 

Builder 

189 

845 Servo X AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

166 

846 Servo Y AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

166 

847 Servo Z AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE ⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

166 

848 

Operati 

on 

X AXIS OPTIMAL R User 250 

849 

Operati 

on 

Y AXIS OPTIMAL R User 250 

850 

Operati 

on 

Z AXIS OPTIMAL R User 250 

874 Spindle 1ST SPD SPEED CHK 0)ACT 1)CMD R 

Machinery 

Builder 

189 

875 Spindle 2ND SPD INITIAL SPEED ⊙ User 186 

876 Spindle MAX SPEED OF 2ND SPINDLE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

179 

877 Spindle MIN SPEED OF 2RD SPINDLE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

179 

878 Spindle 3RD SPD INITIAL SPEED ⊙ User 179 

879 Spindle MAX SPEED OF 3RD SPINDLE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

179 

880 Spindle MIN SPEED OF 3RD SPINDLE R Machinery 179 



Parameter 


881 Spindle 3RD SPD.SPEED ARRIVAL RANGE R 


883 Spindle 2ND SPINDLE D/A SCALE RPM/10V R 

884 Spindle OFFSET VALUE OF 2ND SPINDLE R 

885 Spindle ACC/DEC TIME OF 2ND SPINDLE R 

886 Spindle 3RD SPINDLE D/A SCALE RPM/10V R 

887 Spindle OFFSET VALUE OF 3RD SPINDLE R 

888 Spindle ACC/DEC TIME OF 3RD SPINDLE R 

889 Spindle 2ND SPINDLE ENCODER PPR ⊙ 

890 Spindle 

2ND SPINDLE FEEDBACK 

MULTIPLY 

891 Spindle ENCODER TYPE OF 2ND SPINDLE ⊙ 

892 Spindle 2ND SPD ENC MOUNT 0)SPL 1)MTR R 

893 Spindle 3RD SPINDLE ENCODER PPR ⊙ 

894 Spindle 

3RD SPINDLE FEEDBACK 

MULTIPLY 

895 Spindle ENCODER TYPE OF 3RD SPINDLE ⊙ 

896 Spindle 3RD SPD ENC MOUNT 0)SPL 1)MTR R 

897 Spindle 2ND SPINDLE RPM DISPLAY TYPE R 

898 Spindle 3RD SPINDLE RPM DISPLAY TYPE R 

899 

Operati 

on 

USE CE RULE 0)NO 1)YES 

1000 Servo MAX G00 SPEED.X R 

1001 Servo MAX G00 SPEED.Y R 

1002 Servo MAX G00 SPEED.Z R 

1003 Servo MAX G00 SPEED.4TH R 

⊙ 

⊙ 

R 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

189 

192 

178 

180 

173 

178 

180 

173 

176 

176 

187 

181 

176 

176 

187 

181 

178 

178 

251 

167 

167 

167 

167 



Parameter 


1004 Servo MAX G01 SPEED R 

1006 Operati 

on 

1007 Operati 

on 

1008 Operati 

on 

1009 Operati 

on 

1010 Operati 

on 

1011 Operati 

on 

1012 Operati 

on 

1013 Operati 

on 

1014 Zero 

Return 

1015 Zero 

Return 

1016 Zero 

Return 

1017 Zero 

Return 

1ST X+ SOFT LIMIT 

1ST X- SOFT LIMIT 

1ST Y+ SOFT LIMIT 

1ST Y- SOFT LIMIT 

1ST Z+ SOFT LIMIT 

1ST Z- SOFT LIMIT 

1ST 4+ SOFT LIMIT 

1ST 4- SOFT LIMIT 

ABS COORD.X AFTER HOMING 

ABS COORD.Y AFTER HOMING 

ABS COORD.Z AFTER HOMING 

ABS COORD.4 AFTER HOMING 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

1018 Compe 

nsation COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.X ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

1019 Compe 

nsation COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.Y ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

1020 Compe 

nsation COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.Z ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

1021 Compe 

nsation COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.A ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

X.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 R 

Builder 

222 

1023 Zero 

Machinery 

Y.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 R 

Return 

Builder 

222 

1024 Zero 

Machinery 

Z.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 R 

Return 

Builder 

222 

1025 Zero 

Machinery 

4.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 R 

Return 

Builder 

222 

1026 Zero 

Machinery 

X.OFF FOR ORG.3 REF TO ORG.1 R 

Return 

Builder 

222 

1027 Zero 

Machinery 

Y.OFF FOR ORG.3 REF TO ORG.1 R 

Return 

Builder 

222 

1028 Zero Z.OFF FOR ORG.3 REF TO ORG.1 R Machinery 222 

1022 Zero 

Return 

167 

251 

251 

251 

251 

251 

251 

251 

251 

221 

221 

221 

221 

211 

211 

211 

211 



Parameter 


Return 

1029 Zero 

Return 

1030 Zero 

Return 

1031 Zero 

Return 

1032 Zero 

Return 

1033 Zero 

Return 

1034 Operati 

on 

1035 Operati 

on 

1036 Operati 

on 

1037 Operati 

on 

1038 Operati 

on 

1039 Operati 

on 

1040 Operati 

on 

1041 Operati 

on 

4.OFF FOR ORG.3 REF TO ORG.1 

X.OFF FOR ORG.4 REF TO ORG.1 

Y.OFF FOR ORG.4 REF TO ORG.1 

Z.OFF FOR ORG.4 REF TO ORG.1 

4.OFF FOR ORG.4 REF TO ORG.1 

2ND X+ SOFT LIMIT 

2ND X- SOFT LIMIT 

2ND Y+ SOFT LIMIT 

2ND Y- SOFT LIMIT 

2ND Z+ SOFT LIMIT 

2ND Z- SOFT LIMIT 

2ND 4+ SOFT LIMIT 

2ND 4- SOFT LIMIT 

1042 Servo G31 WORK FEEDRATE R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

1046 Compe 

nsation START.X COMP POS ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

1047 Compe 

nsation START.Y COMP POS ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

1048 Compe 

nsation START.Z COMP POS ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

1049 Compe 

nsation START.4 COMP POS ⊙ Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

1054 Spindle 1ST SPD.SPEED ARRIVAL RANGE R 

1056 Spindle 1ST SPD ORIENT OFFSET VALUE R 

1058 Spindle 

1ST SPD RIGTAP MAX FOLLOW 

ERROR 

1059 Spindle 1ST SPD RIGTAP ACC/DEC TIME R 

1060 Spindle 

1ST SPD RIGTAP EXTRACTION 

RATE 

R 

R 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

222 

223 

223 

223 

223 

252 

253 

252 

253 

252 

253 

252 

253 

168 

212 

212 

212 

212 

189 

190 

190 

191 

191 



Parameter 


1061 Servo Thread Cutting Max. Feedrate R 


1064 Spindle 1ST SPD RIGTAP VELOCITY COMP. R 

1065 Spindle 

1ST SPD RIGTAP ACCELERATED 

COMP 

1066 Spindle 1ST SPD RIGTAP VELOCITY FILTER R 

1070 Spindle 1ST SPD RIGTAP ACC. FILTER R 

1071 Spindle 1ST SPD RIGTAP OUTPUT INVERSE R 

1072 Servo WIDTH OF PULSE RISING ⊙ 

1075 Spindle 1ST SPD SERVOLAG LIMIT R 

1076 Spindle JOG SPEED OF 2ND SPINDLE R 

1077 Spindle JOG SPEED OF 3RD SPINDLE R 

1091 Operati 

on 

1092 Operati 

on 

1093 Operati 

on 

R 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

168 

192 

192 

193 

193 

194 

194 

169 

195 

197 

197 

PROTAG R User 253 

PSCRT R User 253 

PSCRT2 R User 254 

1094 Operati 

on 

PSCRT3 R User 254 

1096 Spindle MAX SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE R 

Machinery 

Builder 

195 

1097 Spindle 1ST SPINDLE D/A SCALE RPM/10V R 

Machinery 

Builder 

196 

1098 Zero 

Machinery 

ABS. ENCODER CHECK RANGE R 

Return 

Builder 

223 

1100 Servo JOG SPEED FOR X AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

169 

1101 Servo JOG SPEED FOR Y AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

170 

1102 Servo JOG SPEED FOR Z AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

170 

1103 Servo JOG SPEED FOR 4TH AXIS R 

Machinery 

Builder 

170 

1104 Zero 

Machinery 

1ST SPEED OF X HOMING 

R 

Return 

Builder 

223 

1105 Zero 1ST SPEED OF Y HOMING R Machinery 223 



Parameter 


Return 

1106 Zero 

Return 

1107 Zero 

Return 

1108 Zero 

Return 

1109 Zero 

Return 

1110 Zero 

Return 

1111 Zero 

Return 

1ST SPEED OF Z HOMING 

1ST SPEED OF C HOMING 

2ST SPEED OF X HOMING 

2ST SPEED OF Y HOMING 

2ST SPEED OF Z HOMING 

2ST SPEED OF C HOMING 

1112 Servo ENCODER.X PULSES/ROTATION ⊙ 

1113 Servo ENCODER.Y PULSES/ROTATION ⊙ 

1114 Servo ENCODER.Z PULSES/ROTATION ⊙ 

1115 Servo ENCODER.4TH PULSES/ROTATION ⊙ 

1116 Spindle 1ST SPINDLE ENCODER PPR ⊙ 

1118 Zero 

Return 

ENABLE INDEX PROTECTED 

FUNCTION 

1121 Spindle JOG SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE R 

1150 Spindle SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE GEAR R 

1151 Spindle SPEED OF 2ND SPINDLE GEAR R 

1152 Spindle SPEED OF 3RD SPINDLE GEAR R 

1153 Spindle 1ST SPD MOTOR RPM OF GEARING R 

1ST SPD MOTOR RPM RANGE OF 

1154 Spindle 

GEAR 

MAX SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE 

1155 Spindle 

GEAR 

MAX SPEED OF 1ND SPINDLE 

1156 Spindle 

GEAR 

MAX SPEED OF 1RD SPINDLE 

1157 Spindle 

GEAR 

1158 Operati 

on 

1159 Operati 

on 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

223 

223 

224 

224 

224 

224 

157 

157 

157 

157 

196 

R User 225 

R 

R 

R 

R 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

197 

197 

197 

198 

198 

199 

199 

199 

200 

SHOW F2~F12 FOR FUN. KEY ⊙ User 254 

SET READ TIMEOUT TIMES User 254 



Parameter 


1171 Zero 

Return 

1172 Zero 

Return 

1173 Zero 

Return 

1174 Zero 

Return 

1175 Zero 

Return 

1176 Zero 

Return 

1177 Zero 

Return 

1178 Zero 

Return 

1183 Zero 

Return 

1184 Zero 

Return 

1185 Zero 

Return 

1186 Zero 

Return 

1196 Machin 

e 

1197 Machin 

e 

1198 Machin 

e 

1199 Machin 

e 

SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF X AXIS 

SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF X AXIS 

SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF Y AXIS 

SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF Y AXIS 

SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF Z AXIS 

SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF Z AXIS 

SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF 4TH 

AXIS 

SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF 4TH 

AXIS 

OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF X AXIS 

OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF Y AXIS 

OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF Z AXIS 

OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF 4TH 

AXIS 

MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.X(UM) 

MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.Y(UM) 

MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.Z(UM) 

MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.C(UM) 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

R 

R 

R 

R 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

⊙ 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

Machinery 

Builder 

1200 Compe 


Builder 

1299 Compe 


Builder 

1300 Compe 


Builder 

1399 Compe 


Builder 

1400 Compe 


Builder 

1499 Compe 


Builder 

1500 Compe 


Builder 

1599 Compe PITCH A COMP.150 R Machinery 207 

225 

225 

225 

225 

225 

225 

225 

225 

226 

226 

226 

226 

172 

172 

172 

172 

205 

205 

206 

206 

207 

207 

207 



Parameter 


nsation 

Builder 



Parameter 

Zero Return Procedure Description 

• When Reference Point is Behind DOG 

伺服軸進給率 

回原點第一段 

速度 F H1 

一 

原點偏移量 

+ 

回原點第二段 

速度 F H2 

Ta 

Ta 

時間 

D1 

D2 

D3 

D4 

D5 

原點擋塊 

馬達 Encoder Z 相訊號 

原點擋塊訊號進來點 

原點擋塊訊號消失點 

機械原點 

1. D1is the distance between two Z phase signals that are close tegether of servo motor 

ECNODER. 

2. D2 is the distance between the HOME DOG input points to the servo axis by using the 

1 st gear speed decelerating stop. The calculating formula is as following: 

D2 ≒ servo lag + deceleration distance ≒ 

F 

K 

H1 H a 

p 

F 

1 

⋅T 

+ 

2 

K p is the servo position loop gain (sec -1 ), , T a is the servo axis G00 

acc/decelerating time. 

If the length between the Home DOG input point and the disappear point is smaller 

than D2, then warning message (MOT 0027 Home DOG length is too short) will occur. 

3. D3 is the traveling distance at the time when servo motor starts from complete stop and 

accelerates to 2 nd gear speed to when Home DOG singnal disappears. In order to 

catch the Z phase signal under the condition of the same speed, the distance of D3 

must be long enough in order for the servo motor to be able to reach the 2 nd gear 

speed. Calculating formula is as following: 

D3 ≧ 

F 

⋅T 

, T a is servo axis G00 acc/deceleration time. 

2 

H 2 a 


So, the length of the Home DOG must be at least (D2 + D3) long. 


Parameter 

4. D4 is the time interval from the disappear point of Home DOG to the next Z phase 

signal of servo motor ECNODER. In order to prevent any confusion that is caused by 

the electric and the machine delay, D4 must be approximately one-half of D1, which 

means the disappear point of Home DOG must be approximately at the mid-point of 

the two Z phase signals that are close to the servo motor. If the motor rotates one time 

but not able to find the Z phase signal after the Home Dog signal is disappear, then the 

aralm message (MOT0045 not able to find the Zl light of motor) will occur. Please 

check whether there is motor connection error. 

5. D5 is the traveling distance from the 1 st Z phase signal of servo motor ENCODER after 

getting away DOG to servo axis in 2 nd gear decelerating stop. The calculating formual 

is as following: 


K p is the servo position loop gain (sec -1 ), , T a 


F 

K 

H 2 H a 

p 

F 

2 

⋅T 

+ 

2 

is the servo axis G00 

The distance between the machine reference point of servo axis and the traveling limit 

must be at least greater than D5. Or it will mistakenly cause travel limitation during zero 

return. 

Recommanding to set the offset amount of the servo axis reference point (parameters 

0030 ~ 0033) greater than D5 in order to prevent any reverse direciton moving of servo 

axis. 

【Example】Assumed a servo axis home return in 1 st gear speed is 10m/min, the 2 nd 

gear speed is 200mm/min, G00 acc/decelerating time is 150ms, position loop gain is 

100sec -1 . Under the condition that the reference point is behind DOG, the calculating 

formula of the shortest needed length of DOG is as following: 

D2 ≒ 

10000 10000 ⋅ 0.15 

60 

+ 

60 

≒ 14.17mm 

100 2 

D3 ≒ 

200 ⋅0.15 

60 

2 

≒ 0.25mm 

So, the shortest needed length of DOG is(D2 + D3) ≒ 14.42mm 

Also, 



Parameter 

D5 ≒ 

200 200 ⋅0.15 

60 + 60 ≒ 0.28mm 

100 2 

If the setting vaule for the offset amount of this axis reference point is larger than 0.28mm, 

it will be able to prevent this axis to do the reverse direction moving at the last step of the 

home return procedure. 

• When Reference Point is Ahead DOG 

伺服軸進給率 

回原點第一段 

速度 F H1 

回原點第二段 

速度 F H2 

Ta 

Ta 

時間 

原點偏移量 

+ 一 

D1 

D4 

D3 

D2 

原點擋塊 

馬達 Encoder Z 相訊號 

機械原點 

原點擋塊訊號進來點以及消失點 

1.D1is the distance between two Z phase signals that are close tegether of servo motor 

ECNODER. 

2.D2 is the distance between the HOME DOG input points to the servo axis by using the 

1 st gear speed decelerating stop. The calculating formula is as following: 




F 

K 

H1 H a 

p 

F 

1 

⋅T 

+ 

2 


If the length between the Home DOG input point and the disappear point is 


smaller than D2, then warning message (MOT 0027 Home DOG length is too 

short) will occur. 


Parameter 

3.D2 is the traveling distance at the time when servo motor starts from complete stop and 

accelerates to 2 nd gear speed to when Home DOG singnal disappears General 

speaking, the 2 nd gear speed is smaller than the 1 st gear speed, so the length of D2 

must be long enough for the servo motor to accelerate to the 2 nd 

means catching the servo motor Z phase signals in the same speed. 

gear speed, which 

4.D3 is the time interval from the disappear point of Home DOG to the next Z phase signal 

of servo motor ECNODER. In order to prevent any confusion that is caused by the 

electric and the machine delay, D4 must be approximately one-half of D1, which means 

the disappear point of Home DOG must be approximately at the mid-point of the two Z 

phase signals that are close to the servo motor. If the motor rotates one time but not 

able to find the Z phase signal after the Home Dog signal is disappear, then the aralm 

message (MOT0045 not able to find the Zl light of motor) will occur. Please check 

whether there is motor connection error. 

5.D4 is the traveling distance from the 1 st Z phase signal of servo motor ENCODER after 

getting away DOG to servo axis in 2 nd gear decelerating stop. The calculating formual is 

as following: 




F 

K 

H 2 H a 

p 

F 

2 

⋅T 

+ 

2 


Recommanding to set the setting value for the offset amount of the servo axis 

reference point that is greater than D4 in order to prevent the servo axis to do the 

reverse direction moving. 



Parameter 

5.2 Servo Parameter 

2 MAX FOLLOWING ERROR X AXIS 

3 MAX FOLLOWING ERROR Y AXIS 

4 MAX FOLLOWING ERROR Z AXIS 

5 MAX FOLLOWING ERROR 4TH AXIS 

Range: 1 ~ 30000 

Active: Active After RESET 

Level: Machinery Builder 

Default 30000 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

this parameter is for settings of the maximum following error on X axis (SERVO 

LAG). Once the following error of X axis exceeds the set value, warning 

message 【MOT 4006 the X axis following error exceeds the value set in 

parameter 0002】 will be stimulated. 

In situations when the servo axis in consisten velocity, the following error can be 

found in the following formula. 

lag = F / K p F = feedrate, K p= position loop gain 

As you may find in this formula, the higher the feedrate is, the larger the 

following error value is. Therefore, you may apply the highest speed of the 

X-axis into this formula to figure out the maximum following error value. 

【Example】 

The position loop gain value of X axis is 100sec -1 ,G00 is 20000mm/min. In 

RAPID TRAVERSE, the following error will be: 

lag = (20000000um / 60s) / (100s -1 ) = 3333.3um 

Under normal situation, the following error value of X axis should not exceed 

3334um, therefore, it is suggested to add a tolerance range of 10% into this 

value when you set this parameter 0002. 



Parameter 

6 X IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND 

7 Y IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND 

8 Z IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND 

9 4TH IN-POS WINDOWS BOUND 

Range: 1 ~ 20000 



Default 50 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description This parameter is to set the bound value of in-position check window of X axis 

: 

in exact stop mode (G09 or G61). When | X-axis command position – X-axis 

actual position | ≦ parameter set value, X-axis has accomplished G01 exact 

stop. Please refer to parameter # 0043. 



Parameter 

10 G00 X ACC/DEC TIME 

11 G00 Y ACC/DEC TIME 

12 G00 Z ACC/DEC TIME 

13 G00 4TH ACC/DEC TIME 

Range: 3 ~ 1500 

Active: Active After Reboot 


Default 230 

value: 

Unit: ms 

Description 

: 

This parameter is to set the acceleration/deceleration time of G00 on X-axis. 

The smaller this parameter is, the faster the X-axis reaches the specified speed; 

vibration, however, would be more indispensable. In 486IPC version (the IPO is 

5ms), the max. value is 2000; in 586IPC version (the IPO is 3ms), the max. 

value is 1500. 

If the set value exceeds the above limit, the 【MOT 4031 set error in X-axis G00 

acceleration/deceleration (parameter #0010) 】 warning message will be 

stimulated. 



Parameter 

14 G01 ACC/DEC TIME 

Range: 3 ~ 1500 



Default 100 

value: 

Unit: ms 

Description This parameter is to set the acceleration/deceleration time of G00 on ALL 

: 

SERVO AXIS. The smaller this parameter is, the faster the servo axis reach the 

specified speed; vibration, however, would be more indispensable. In 486IPC 

version (the IPO is 10ms), the max. value is 2000; in 586IPC version (the IPO is 

3ms), the max. value is 1500. 

If the set value exceeds the above limit, the 【MOT 4030 set error in X-axis G00 

acceleration/deceleration (parameter #0014) 】 warning message will be 

stimulated. 

24 CHANNEL NO FOR X AXIS 

25 CHANNEL NO FOR Y AXIS 

26 CHANNEL NO FOR Z AXIS 

27 CHANNEL NO FOR 4 AXIS 

Range: 0 ~ 6 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

if X(Y、Z、4 th ) axis is wired to the Nth-axis port e Transit board, this parameter is 

set to N. If no motor is connected, then this parameter is set to 0. 



Parameter 

40 MIN.F OVERRIDE VALUE FOR G00 

Range: 0 ~ 25 


Level: User 

Default 10 

value: 

Unit: % 

Description This parameter is to set the correspondent % value of RAPID TRAVERSE when 

: 

the feedrate OVERRIDE knob is set to 0%. For example, is this parameter is set 

as 10, when the OVERRIDE knob is set to 0%, actually it corresponds to 10%. 

53 FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.4TH 

54 FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.X 

55 FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.Y 

56 FEEDBACK MUL FACTOR.Z 

Range: 1 ~ 4 



Default 4 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

This parameter is to set the feedback multiply factor of the X-axis ENCODER 

and is effect only when X-axis ENCODER feedback signal is set as AB PHASE 

(i.e. Parameter # 0191 set as 0). If the X-axis ENCODER feedback signal is set 

as CW/CCW or PULSE/DIRECTION (i.e. Parameter # 0191 set as 1 or 2), the 

feedback multiply factor remains 1 all the time. 

In PULSE COMMAND mode, the value is the product of this parameter set 

value and the set value of Parameter #0058 (i.e. ppr) is the total pulse per 

rotation that NC intents to let the X-axis motor to achieve. 



Parameter 

1112 ENCODER.X PULSES/ROTATION 

1113 ENCODER.Y PULSES/ROTATION 

1114 ENCODER.Z PULSES/ROTATION 

1115 ENCODER.4TH PULSES/ROTATION 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 



Default 2500 

value: 

Unit: pulse 

Description 

: 

Assumed PULSE per rotation of this axis Motor Encoder is 2500, please set this 

parameter value to 2500. Please also refer to each axis feedback ratio multiplier 

setting description 

65 ABSOLUTE ENCODER (BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description BIT 0:Setting 0 to indicate X axis uses Incremental Encoder and 1 to indicate X 

: 

axis uses Absolute Encoder. 

BIT 1:Setting 0 to indicate Y axis uses Incremental Encoder and 1 to indicate Y 


BIT 2:Setting 0 to indicate Z axis uses Incremental Encoder and 1 to indicate Z 


BIT 3:Setting 0 to indicate the 4th axis uses Incremental Encoder and 1 to 

indicate the 4th axis uses Absolute Encoder. 



Parameter 

66 4TH AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0: rotary axis 

: 

1: linear axis 

If the 4 th -axis is linear axis, please set the lead screw pitch (Parameter #0107); 

if the 4 th -axis is rotary axis, please set the lead screw pitch as 360 (i.e. 360 ∘ ). 

85 MAX FOLLOWING ERROR X100 (BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description BIT0:when set as 1, the maximum following error of X-axis (parameter # 0002) 

: 

is magnified 100 times. 

BIT1: when set as 1, the maximum following error of Y-axis (parameter # 0003) 


BIT2:when set as 1, the maximum following error of Z-axis (parameter # 0004) 


BIT3:when set as 1, the maximum following error of 4 TH -axis (parameter # 

0005) is magnified 100 times. 



Parameter 

108 MORTOR GAINS.X 

109 MORTOR GAINS.Y 

110 MORTOR GAINS.Z 

111 MORTOR GAINS.4TH 

Range: 1 ~ 20000 



Default 200 

value: 

Unit: RPM/1V 

Description 

: 

using this parameter to set the corresponding rotational speed (RPM) when the 

X axis motor entry voltage is 1V. When the entry voltage is 10V, the X axis 

motor rotational speed is 2000RPM, which means the parameter setting value is 

200. This parameter is effective only when X axis control method is V 

COMMAND (Setting value of Parameter 0156 is 3). 



Parameter 

116 MOVING DIR OF SERVO AXES(BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description BIT0:when set as 1, the X-axis should move in reverse direction against 

: 

previous movement. When set as 0, there is no reverse movement. 

BIT1:when set as 1, the Y-axis should move in reverse direction against 


BIT2:when set as 1, the Z-axis should move in reverse direction against 


BIT3:when set as 1, the 4 TH -axis should move in reverse direction against 


BIT4:when set as 1, the spindle-axis should rotate in reverse direction against 

previous. When set as 0, there is no reverse rotation. This only effects 

only when the spindle is under PULSE COMMAND, such as spindle 

orientation and rigid tapping. 

Description: Take the X-axis for example, under JOG mode, if you pressed the 

+x button on the OP panel, the machine X-axis moves in negative direction, it 

means motor’s positive rotation is in reverse to +X axis direction. Please set 

BIT0 as 1. if you pressed the +x button on the OP panel, the machine X-axis 

moves in positive direction as well, please set BIT0 as 0. Such is the same with 

all the rest axis. 



Parameter 

156 CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF X 

157 CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF Y 

158 CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF Z 

159 CONTROL CMD FORMAT OF 4 

Range: 0 ~ 3 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:A/B PHASE; 

1:CW/CCW; 

2:PULSE/DIRECTION。 

Besides setting command type from the NC side, you have to select the same 

command type in MOTOR DRIVER side. If set as 1 or 2, you are also required 

to set the pulse wide. Please refer to Parameter # 1072. (When set as A/B 

PHASE, the motion board will automatically adjust to 50% DURATION). 

172 G00 ACC. TYPE 0)LINE 1)S CURVE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Linear acceleration/deceleration 

1:S-curve acceleration/deceleration 

Servo Axis 

Para. #1000 ~ Para. 1003 #1000 Setting ~ 1003 Setting 

Servo Axis 

Para.# 0010 ~ 0013 Setting 

Time 

Linear Acc/Dec 

Time 

Para.# 0010 ~ 0013 Setting 

S Curve Acc/Dec 



Parameter 



Parameter 

173 G01 ACC. TYPE 0)LINE 1)S CURVE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Expolantial acceleration/deceleration 

1:S-curve acceleration/deceleration 

Servo Axis 

Feed Rate 

time 

Para.# 0014 Setting 

Linear Acc/Dec 

time 

Para.# 0014 Setting 

S Curve Acc/Dec 



Parameter 

185 FEEDBACK DIR OF SERVO AXES(BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description BIT0:when set as 1, means negative X-axis ENCODER feedback signal 

: 

BIT1:when set as 1, means negative Y-axis ENCODER feedback signal BIT2: 

when set as 1, means negative Z-axis ENCODER feedback signal 

BIT3:when set as 1, means negative 4 TH -axis ENCODER feedback signal 

BIT4:when set as 1, means negative spindle ENCODER feedback signal 

【Setting timing】 

Take X-axis for example, if X-axis is set as PULSE TYPE, when you press the 

+X button of OP panel, the machine X-axis moves in positive direction, but the 

value of system data #000(X-axis following error) continuously increases, and 

this value doesn’t decrease down to the range of ±1, it means that you have to 

reverse the X-axis ENCODER signal. 

(Usually this is caused when the BIT0 of parameter # 0116 is set as 1.) In this 

case, please set the BIT0 of parameter # 0116 as 1. If the above didn’t occur, 

please set the BIT0 of parameter # 0116 as 0. If X-axis is under V COMMAND 

mode, when you press the +X button of OP panel, the machine X-axis rushes, it 

means that you have to reverse the X-axis ENCODER signal. In this case, 

please set the BIT0 of this parameter as1. 

So is the same with all the other axis. 

188 POSITION LOOP GAN OF EACH AXIS 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 30 

value: 

Unit: 1/sec 

Description This parameter is to calculate and make sure that the contour error remain with 

: 

the tolerance via arch feedrate auto clamp function. (please refer to Parameter 

# 0187). Under PULSE TYPE, since servo driver deals with position control 

loop, NC system is not able to know this set value. If you want to enable the 

arch feedrate auto clamp function, you have to set a position loop gain in your 

formula. Notice that the position loop gain of each axis must be the same 

otherwise the actual contour of the arch command will become ellipse. 

Please refer to related parameters (#0187 and # 0809). 

191 ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.X 

192 ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.Y 

193 ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.Z 

194 ENCODER SIGNALE TYPE.4TH 

Range: 0 ~ 3 



Parameter 

Active: 

Level: 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

Active After Reboot 

Machinery Builder 

0 

Nul 

0:A/B PHASE 

1:CW/CCW 

2:PULSE/DIRECTION 

3:none 

This parameter is to set the ENCODER signal type of each axis. Please refer to 

the settings of motor drivers. If the each axis motor is not equipped with 

ENCODER, such as in cases of stepping motor, please set this parameter as 3. 



Parameter 

800 RANGE.X FOR EXACT REACH 

801 RANGE.Y FOR EXACT REACH 

802 RANGE.Z FOR EXACT REACH 

803 RANGE.4TH FOR EXACT REACH 

Range: 1 ~ 20000 



Default 500 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description This parameter is to set the bound value of in-position check window of X axis 

: 

when G00 exact stop is enabled. (Please refer to parameter # 0043). When | 

X-axis command position – X-axis axis actual position | ≦ parameter set value, 

X-axis has accomplished G00 exact stop. 

845 X AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE 

846 Y AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE 

847 Z AXIS LINEAR/ROTARY TYPE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:0:Linear axis is set for X axis and ball screw pitch is set according to actual 

value. 

1:Rotary axis is set for X axis and ball screw pitch is set to 360 o . 



Parameter 

1000 MAX G00 SPEED.X 

1001 MAX G00 SPEED.Y 

1002 MAX G00 SPEED.Z 

1003 MAX G00 SPEED.4TH 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 



Default 5000000 

value: 

Unit: um/min 

Description 

: 

In G00 commanded, the maximum speed X-axis is set in this parameter, but not 

the feedrate specified by F code. This parameter also specifies the maximum 

speed X-axis under RAPID TRAVERSE mode. 

1004 MAX G01 SPEED 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 




value: 

Unit: um/min 

Description This parameter decides the value of the below items: 

: 

1. Highest feedrate of G01; 

2. Highest feedrate of G02/03; 

3. Feedrate of G01/02/03 in DRY RUN mode. 

If the user gives a F code that exceeds the set value of this parameter, NC will 

automatically clamp its feedrate. 



Parameter 

1042 G31 WORK FEEDRATE 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 



Default 2000 

value: 

Unit: um/min 

Description If the feedrate is specified in G31 block, the command value will be the feedrate 

: 

of the block; if no feedrate is specified in G31, then the feedrate is the set value 

of this parameter. 

1061 Thread Cutting Max. Feedrate 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 




value: 

Unit: um 

Description During Lathe tapping, cutting axis feedrate is decided by Spindle rotational 

: 

speed and thread pitch. When the combination value cause the cutting axis 

feedrate is over this parameter setting value, System Alarm【MOT 4061: Lathe 

Tapping Speed Over Setting Value】 will occur. 



Parameter 

1072 WIDTH OF PULSE RISING 

Range: 1 ~ 50 



Default 20 

value: 

Unit: us 

Description In PULSE COMMAND type, this parameter is to set the pulse wid, as shown in 

: 

the below figure. The pulse cycle can be expressed in the below formula. (linear 

axis) 

Pulse Upper 

Period: T 

1 feedrate 

= × GR × Pulse/rev 

T pitch 

× 

1 

60000 

, unit:ms 

Example: X-axis pitch = 10mm, gear ratio is 2(deceleratin ratio, motor rotates 

2 times and ball screw rotates one time). In the condition when it takes 10000 

Pulses for the motor to complete a rotation, if the feedrate is set as 

2000mm/min, then the pulse amount per 1ms should be: 

Pulses = 

2000 

10 

× 2 × 10000 × 

Commanding Pulse Rush Period is: 

T 

= 

1000 

67 

1 

60000 

≈ 15us 

≈ 67pulses/ms 

Under this condition and the condition of maintaining pulse rush is 50% of 

DURATION (High/Low Standard Position Time), the raising width shoue be set 

as 7us. 

If the setting value of this parameter is too big, it is possible to cause the raising 

width of the pulse rush over the period in high speed motion. This will further 

cause the commanding pulse rush to double with each other. At this time, motor 

DRIVER will not able to do the determination correctly, which will make the 

servo motor not able to rotate normally. 

But, if the setting value is too small, the motor DRIVER still not able to do the 

determination. So, the maximum setting value of this parameter should be 

under the max motion speed (G00). Also the upper limit is the width of the 

non-double commanding pulse rush rows. The smallest value should be the 

smallest width value that the motor DRIVER is able to determine. 

1100 JOG SPEED FOR X AXIS 



Parameter 

1101 JOG SPEED FOR Y AXIS 

1102 JOG SPEED FOR Z AXIS 

1103 JOG SPEED FOR 4TH AXIS 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 




value: 

Unit: um/min 

Description This parameter is to set the JOG speed of X-axis. 

: 



Parameter 

5.3 Machine Parameter 

62 UNITS OF #104~#107 PARAMS 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is used to set unit system for the setting value of parameters 

0104 ~ 0107. 

68 DENOMINATOR OF GEAR RATIO.X 

69 DENOMINATOR OF GEAR RATIO.Y 

70 DENOMINATOR OF GEAR RATIO.Z 

72 DENOMINATOR GEAR RATIO.4 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

This parameter is to set the denominator for X axis motor gearratio. If gear ratio 

of X axis is bigger than 1, there is a deceleration relationship between X axis 

motor and ball screw. If gear ratio of X axis is smaller than 1, there is an 

acceleration relationship between X axis motor and ball screw. 

100 NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.X 

101 NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.Y 

102 NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.Z 

103 NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.4 

272 NUMERATOR OF GEAR RATION.5 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

This parameter is to set the numerator for each axis ball screw. 

If the gear ratio of each axis is bigger than 1, there is a deceleration relationship 

between each axis motor and ball screw. If this ratio is smaller than 1, there is 

an acceleration relationship of each axis motor and ball screw. 



Parameter 

104 SCREW PITCH.X 

105 SCREW PITCH.Y 

106 SCREW PITCH.Z 

107 SCREW PITCH.4 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 360 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description this parameter is to set ball screw pitch of each axis. 

: 

1196 MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.X(UM) 

1197 MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.Y(UM) 

1198 MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.Z(UM) 

1199 MAXIMUM TABLE RADIUS.C(UM) 

Range: 0 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:When only one axis is in motion, this parameter times feed rate equals to 

cutting speed. If the cutting speed is over the maximum speed allowable as set 

by parameter No. 1004, CNC controller will adjust the command value of feed 

rate to make it conform to the set value of parameter No. 1004. When more 

than one axis is in motion, the combined cutting speed of each axis must be 

taken into account. If one of the axes is a linear axis, please set this parameter 

to 0. 



Parameter 

5.4 Spindle Parameter 

16 ACC/DEC TIME OF 1ST SPINDLE 

885 ACC/DEC TIME OF 2ND SPINDLE 

888 ACC/DEC TIME OF 3RD SPINDLE 

Range: 0 ~ 32767 



Default 1000 

value: 

Unit: MS/KRPM 

Description 

: 

This parameter sets the corresponding output voltage of Spindle rotation and 

acc/deceleration speed of Pulse command. When Spindle rotational signal uses 

voltage output, user must sets OFFSET of voltage output signal and the 

corresponding RPM of 10 V. 

21 1ST SPD ORIENTATION RPM 

Range: 1 ~ 20000 



Default 100 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description this parameter is used to set rotational speed of spindle orientation . When the 

: 

spindle orientation is doing machine adjustment, the spindle rotational speed is 

decided by this parameter. In order to prevent any error by different rotational 

speed, please do NOT modify this parameter setting value after machine 

adjustment of spindle orientation is completed. 



Parameter 

29 CORRESPONDING TO 1ST SPINDLE 

294 CORRESPONDING TO 2ND SPINDLE 

295 CORRESPONDING TO 3RD SPINDLE 

Range: 0 ~ 16 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

if connecting the spindle connection cable to the N axis on transit board, then 

the parameter is set as N. But, if there is no spindle, then set 0. 

49 NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.1M GEAR 

664 NUMBER OF 2ND SPINDLE.1M GEAR 

672 NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.1M GEAR 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the denominator of the 1 st motor gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 1 st gear, C BIT 097 is ON. 

If this ratio is greater than 1, it is a deceleration relationship between the motor 

and the spindle. If this ratio is smaller than 1, it is an acceleration relationship 

between the motor and the spindle. 



Parameter 

50 NUMBER OF 1ST SPINDLE.1A GEAR 

665 NUMBER OF 2ND SPINDLE.1A GEAR 

673 NUMBER OF 3RD SPINDLE.1A GEAR 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the numerator of the 1 st spindle gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 1 st gear, C BIT 097 is ON. 







Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the denominator of the 2 nd motor gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 2 nd gear, C BIT 098 is ON. 






Parameter 




Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the numerator of the 2 nd spindle gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 2nd gear, C BIT 097 is ON. 




57 1ST SPINDLE FEEDBACK MULTIPLY 

890 2ND SPINDLE FEEDBACK MULTIPLY 

894 3RD SPINDLE FEEDBACK MULTIPLY 

Range: 1 ~ 4 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set ENCODER feedback multiple factor of spindle, this 

parameter works only when the ENCODER feedback multiple factor of spindle 

is AB PHASE (setting value of Parameter 0195 is 0); if the ENCODER feedback 

multiple factor of spindle is CW/CCW or PULSE/DIRECTION (setting value of 

Parameter 0195 is either 1 or 2), then the feedback multiple factor of spindle is 

1 permanently. 

Assumed the spindle control method is PULSE COMMAND (under spindle 

orientation and rigid rapping modes), the multiple product of this parameter 

setting value and parameter #1116 setting value (total pulse per rotation of 

spindle motor ENCODER) is the PLUSE command value that is sent by NC in 

order to make spindle motor to rotates one time. If the spindle control method is 

V COMMAND, then the multiple product of this parameter setting value and the 

parameter 1116 setting value will only be used to calculate the actual rotational 

speed of spindle. 

889 2ND SPINDLE ENCODER PPR 

893 3RD SPINDLE ENCODER PPR 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1024 

value: 



Parameter 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

pulse 

Assumed PULSE per rotation of Motor Encoder is 2500, please set this 

parameter value to 2500. 

84 1ST SPD ORIENT 0)SENSOR 1)ENC. 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Orientation Sensor of Spindle orientation basic point. 

1:Encoder Index of Spindle orientation basic point. 



Parameter 

90 1ST SPINDLE RPM DISPLAY TYPE 

897 2ND SPINDLE RPM DISPLAY TYPE 

898 3RD SPINDLE RPM DISPLAY TYPE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:showing commanding value; 

1:showing encoder feedback. At this time NC will calculate the actual rotating 

speed from the spindle motor ENCODER feedback signal and the actual 

rotating speed will be showed on HMI panel. 

If the spindle motor hasn’t install ENCODER, please set this parameter to 0 to in 

order to prevent the problem of not able to check rotating speed. 

883 2ND SPINDLE D/A SCALE RPM/10V 

886 3RD SPINDLE D/A SCALE RPM/10V 

Range: 1 ~ 99999 



Default 6000 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description 

: 

When the spindle 10V corresponds to 3000 RPM, please set this parameter to 

3000. Please notice that this will be effective only when Spindle driver is in V 

Command mode. 



Parameter 

95 MIN SPEED OF 1RD SPINDLE 

876 MAX SPEED OF 2ND SPINDLE 


878 3RD SPD INITIAL SPEED 

879 MAX SPEED OF 3RD SPINDLE 


Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the lowest rotational speed of the spindle. When the 

lowest rotational speed command of the spindle (is set by user) is smaller than 

this parameter setting value, the system will use this parameter setting to drive 

the spindle. 



Parameter 

98 OFFSET VALUE OF 1ST SPINDLE 

884 OFFSET VALUE OF 2ND SPINDLE 

887 OFFSET VALUE OF 3RD SPINDLE 

Range: -5000 ~ 5000 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: 0.3mV 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set OFFSET amount of spindle commanding voltage. The 

actual commanding voltage that is sent to the spindle inverter is calculated by 

the commanding voltage of spindle rotational sped minus this parameter setting 

value. The present system axis board’s DAC is 16 Bits, corresponding to ±10. 

So the analytic degree is 

10 

32768 

which is the unit of this parameter. 

= 0.305mV 



Parameter 

892 2ND SPD ENC MOUNT 0)SPL 1)MTR 

896 3RD SPD ENC MOUNT 0)SPL 1)MTR 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

Setting the Spindle Loop Encoder installation position: 

0:Beside Spindle 

1:Beside Motor 



Parameter 

171 FEEDBACK DIR. OF SPINDLES(BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 7 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:No, program coordinate value is the absolute coordinate display value 

1:Yes, the sum of program coordinate value plus tool length compensation 

value is the absolute coordinate display value. 

【Example】Assumed the tool length compensation of #1 tool is -50mm, 

if the setting value of this parameter is 0: 

Program Command 

Z Axis Abs. Z Axis Mac. 

Coordinate Coordinate 

G00 Z0.; 0. 0. 

G43 H1; 0. 0. 

G01 Z10. F1000.; 10. -40. 

… … … 

if the setting value of this parameter is 1: 

Z Axis Abs. Z Axis Mac. 

Program Command 

Coordinate Coordinate 

G00 Z0.; 0. 0. 

G43 H1; 0. 0. 

G01 Z10. F1000.; -40. -40. 

… … … 



Parameter 




Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the denominator of the 3 rd motor gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 3 rd gear, C BIT 099 is ON. 

If this ratio is larger than 1, there is a deceleration relationship between the 

motor and the spindle. If it is less than 1, there is an acceleration relationship 





Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

using this parameter to set the numerator of the 3 rd spindle gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 3 rd gear, C BIT099 is ON. 







Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the denominator of the 4 th motor gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 4 th gear, C BIT 097 ~ 099 is OFF. 





Parameter 





Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

using this parameter to set the numerator of the 4 th spindle gear ratio. When the 

spindle is at the 4 th gear, C BIT 097 ~ 099 is OFF. 




183 1ST SPD VLOCITY COMMAND TYPE 

296 2ND SPD VLOCITY COMMAND TYPE 

297 3RD SPD VLOCITY COMMAND TYPE 

Range: 0 ~ 4 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

This parameter sets the command format of the spindle rotation speed. The 

system’s preset command format is voltage output. If the motor driver of the 

spindle has a PG card or the spindle motor is servo motor, the output command 

format of the spindle can be set in a pulse format that the motor driver accepts. 



Parameter 

184 1ST SPD ORT. LOCAL INPUT SET 

Range: 1 ~ 10 



Default 9 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Description 

0 0 1 To Local input 1 (HS1 on Transit Board)( Default) 

0 1 0 To Local input 2(HS2 on Transit Board) 

Bit3 

Description 

0 NC 

1 NO(Default) 

BIT0 ~ BIT2:To set connecting point number of Spindle orientation sensor 

signal. If the setting value is 1, it means it is HS1 point on the transit board. If 

the setting value is 2, it means it is HS2 point on the transit board. 

BIT3 :To set the Spindle orientation sensor signal type. Setting value is 0 

means NC and setting value is 0 means NO. 

If Spindle orientation sensor connection point is HS1 and the signal format is 

NC,then setting value is 1. If Spindle orientation sensor connection point is HS1 

and the setting format is NO, setting value is 9. If Spindle orientation sensor 

connection point is HS2 and the signal format is NC,then setting value is 2. If 

Spindle orientation sensor connection point is HS2 and the setting format is NO, 

setting value is 10. 



Parameter 

189 1ST SPD INITIAL SPEED 

875 2ND SPD INITIAL SPEED 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description Spindle default rotational speed when system start 

: 

190 1ST SPD POSITION COMMAND TYPE 

Range: 0 ~ 6 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0:A/B PHASE 

: 

1:CW/CCW 


System is use PULSE COMMAND to drive Spindle when it s doing Spindle 

orientation and is under rigid tapping mode. This parameter is to set this 

commanding PULSE format. Please set the commanding PLUSE format 

according to Spindle inventor. 



Parameter 

195 ENCODER TYPE OF 1ST SPINDLE 

891 ENCODER TYPE OF 2ND SPINDLE 

895 ENCODER TYPE OF 3RD SPINDLE 

Range: 0 ~ 3 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the spindle Encoder’s output signal type. 

0:A/B PHASE 

1:CW/CCW 


3:none 

226 MOVING DIR. OF SPINDLES(BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 7 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:BIT 0: When set to 1, motion direction of the 1 st spindle must be reversed; 

BIT 1: When set to 1, motion direction of the 2 nd spindle must be reversed; 

BIT 2: When set to 1, motion direction of the 3 rd spindle must be reversed; 

Only valid when output command format of the spindle is in pulse format. 

240 1ST SPD POS GAIN AT ORIENTATION 

Range: 0 ~ 20000 



Default 30 

value: 

Unit: 1/S 

Description When the spindle’s command format in control mode is V command (parameter 

: 

No. 0190 = 3), this parameter sets the spindle’s proportional gain during 

positioning. 

241 1ST SPD POS GAIN AT RIGID TAP 

Range: 0 ~ 20000 



Default 30 



Parameter 

value: 

Unit: 1/S 

Description:When the spindle’s command format in control mode is V command (parameter 

No. 0190 = 3), this parameter sets the spindle’s proportional gain during rigid 

tapping. 

248 1ST SPD ORIENT OFFSET UNIT 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: NUL 

Description:0: Unit of OFFSET amount between Spindle Orientation point and center point 

(Parameter #1056 and System Data #10) is pulse. 

1: Unit of OFFSET amount between Spindle Orientation point and center point 

(Parameter #1056 and System Data #10) is 0.001 degree. 

354 1ST SPD OVERRIDE UNIT 

355 2ND SPD OVERRIDE UNIT 

356 3RD SPD OVERRIDE UNIT 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:0:The 1 st (2 nd & 3 rd ) spindle’s rotation override speed = R015 (R019、R020) 

register value * 10%; 

1:The 1 st (2 nd & 3 rd ) spindle’s rotation override speed = R015 (R019、R020 ) 

register value* 1%。 

393 1ST SPINDEL GEARING METHOD 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:Choose either “automatic” or “manual” gear change method to be the spindle’s 

gear change method 

0:Automatic gear change 

1:Manual gear change 



Parameter 

663 1ST SPD ORIENT ACC/DEC TIME 

Range: 0 ~ 1500 



Default 100 

value: 

Unit: ms 

Description 

: 

This parameter is to set the acceleration and deceleration time of Spindle 

orientation (including Spindle Adjustment). 

839 1ST SPD ORIENT CHECK TOLERANCE 

Range: 0 ~ 32767 



Default 1000 

value: 

Unit: 0.001 degree 

Description This parameter is to se the allowable error amount of Spindle Orientation. If the 

: 

difference between Spindle stopping position and the actual orientation position 

is smaller than this parameter setting value, Spindle orientation task can be 

meant as accomplish. However, if the difference amount is larger than this 

parameter setting value, System Alarm 【MOT 4049 Spindle Orientation 

Exceed Allowable Error】 will occur. 

224 2ND SPD SPEED CHK 0)ACT 1)CMD 

225 3RD SPD SPEED CHK 0)ACT 1)CMD 

874 1ST SPD SPEED CHK 0)ACT 1)CMD 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:0:Spindle rotational speed checking signal source is Spindle Loop Encoder. 

1:Spindle rotational speed checking signal source is Spindle rotational 

command. 

298 2ND SPD.SPEED ARRIVAL RANGE 

881 3RD SPD.SPEED ARRIVAL RANGE 

1054 1ST SPD.SPEED ARRIVAL RANGE 

Range: 1 ~ 20000 





Parameter 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

50 

RPM 

Description:under the condition that parameter 0090 is 1 (Spindle rotational speed is the 

actually speed), the system will calculate the actual rotational speed according 

to the spindle ENCODER feedback signal. 

When | Spindle actual rotational speed – spindle command rotational speed | is 

less than or equal to this parameter setting value, the system will set S BIT 088 

to ON. Also, it will inform PL that the spindle actual rotational speed to is arrived 

to the commanding value. If this parameter setting value is too small, it is 

possible to cause the system’s checking spindle actual rotational speed not able 

to arrive within the error range, which will not set S BIT 088 to ON. This further 

causes S code or M3, and M4 commands not able to end. 

1056 1ST SPD ORIENT OFFSET VALUE 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: pulse 

Description:During Spindle orientation, this parameter sets the OFFSET amount of 

positioning final point and basic point. Parameter # 0248 can assign pulse or 

0.001 degree as OFFSET amount unit. 

1058 1ST SPD RIGTAP MAX FOLLOW ERROR 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 3000 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description:during rigid tapping, if the following error limit of Z-axis is larger than this setting 

value, the system will stop rigid tapping. Also, the system warning message 

(MOT 0052 error in rigid tapping is over limit) will occur. After machine 

adjustment, please set this parameter to a smaller value in order to prevent 

wrong motion that may cause damage of machines. After the rigid tapping 

machine adjustment is completed, please set the value that is 5 〜10 times 

larger than the display value from system data #021 on DGNOS page. 



Parameter 

1059 1ST SPD RIGTAP ACC/DEC TIME 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 500 

value: 

Unit: ms 

Description:setting under the rigid tapping mode, spindle’s acc/deceleration time. Since 

under the rigid tapping mode, the movement amount of Z-axis is calculated by 

the spindle movement so this parameter also set the acc/deceleration time for 

Z-axis. 

1060 1ST SPD RIGTAP EXTRACTION RATE 

Range: 1 ~ 400 



Default 100 

value: 

Unit: % 

Description during rigid tapping returning, the needed cutting power is small, so can use this 

: 

parameter to set the increasing return speed. 

Example, if setting value is 200, this means during returning procedure, the 

spindle turns by two times of the original commanding rotational speed, Z-axis 

moves by two times of the original commanding the feedrate. But, the faster the 

rotational speed, the larger the following error of Z-axis. So must be careful in 

order to prevent crash situation. Also, must be careful of the limitation of the 

highest turning speed of the spindle and the highest cutting speed of the Z-axis. 



Parameter 

299 2RD SPINDLE ZERO SPEED RANGE 



Range: 1 ~ 20000 



Default 10 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description 

: 

under the condition that parameter 0090 is 1 (actual value of 

spindle rotational speed), the system ENCODER feedback signal will 

calculate the actual rotational speed. When the spindle actual rotational speed 

is less than or equal to this parameter setting value, the system will set S BIT 

092 to ON and also inform the PLC that the spindle actual rotational speed has 

reached zero speed already. 

1064 1ST SPD RIGTAP VELOCITY COMP. 

Range: 0 ~ 100000 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description when the rigid tapping machine adjustment is completed, 

: 

please set the commanding compensation value as the display value from data 

system #023 at (Diagnostic) DGNOS page. 



Parameter 

1065 1ST SPD RIGTAP ACCELERATED COMP 

Range: 0 ~ 100000 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description after rigid tapping is completed, please set the commanding 

: 

compensation value as the display value of data system #022 at 

(Diagnostic) DGNOS page. 

1066 1ST SPD RIGTAP VELOCITY FILTER 

Range: 0 ~ 20 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description the bigger the value, the less vibration will occur. , but the 

: 

bigger the rigid tapping following error will be. When enter 0, this means 

there is no filting effect. When enter the maximum value (i.e., 20), this 

means there is a completely filting effect, which means the signal is filited 

completely. Please adjust this parameter setting value during the rigid 

tapping machine adjustment. 



Parameter 

1070 1ST SPD RIGTAP ACC. FILTER 

Range: 0 ~ 20 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description the bigger the value, the less vibration will occur and the 

: 

smaller of the following error. But, it is NOT absolute, which means there is 

an optimal value under certain filter intensity. When enter 0, it means there 

is no filting effect. When enter the maximum value (i.e., 20), it means there 

is a completely filting effect, which means the signal is filited completely. 

Please adjust this parameter setting value during the rigid tapping machine 

adjustment. 

1071 1ST SPD RIGTAP OUTPUT INVERSE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description When the spindle +ive rotating direction under rigid tapping is 

: 

not the same as that under not rigid tapping mode, please set this parameter to 

1. Please adjust this parameter setting value during rigid tapping machine 

adjustment. 



Parameter 

1075 1ST SPD SERVOLAG LIMIT 

Range: 0 ~ 100000 



Default 4096 

value: 

Unit: Pulse 

Description when rigid tapping machine adjustment is complete, please set the value or the 

: 

allowable following error that is 5-10 times larger of the display value from data 

system #26 at DGNOS page. If this setting value is too small, it is possible to 

cause the system alarm (MOT 055 rigid tapping spindle servo error is over the 

allowable limit) to occur during rigid tapping. 

1096 MAX SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 6000 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description this parameter is used to set the max rotational speed ofspindle. When spindle 

: 

command rotational speed, which is set by user, islarger than this Parameter 

setting value, the system will restrict the spindlerotational speed according to 

this parameter setting value. 



Parameter 

1097 1ST SPINDLE D/A SCALE RPM/10V 

Range: 1 ~ 99999 



Default 6000 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the corresponding spindle rotational 

speed when the spindle motor input voltage is 10V. 

1116 1ST SPINDLE ENCODER PPR 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 



Default 1024 

value: 

Unit: pulse 

Description Assumed total pulse per rotation of spindle motor ENCODER is 2500, this 

: 

means this parameter is set to 2500. Please refer to parameter # 0057 for 

setting description. 



Parameter 

1076 JOG SPEED OF 2ND SPINDLE 

1077 JOG SPEED OF 3RD SPINDLE 

1121 JOG SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 200 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description 

: 

When C BIT 072 is ON, spindle will rotate in this parameter’s setting rotational 

speed. 

1150 SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE GEAR 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description this parameter is to determine whether or not to do gear 

: 

shifting motion according to the spindle S code command. 

1. when the spindle is at 1 st gear and assuming that the user command of the 

spindle S code command is larger than (not including equal to) this 

parameter setting value, the system will inform PLC to do the gear shifting 

motion (shifting to which gear depends on the spindle commanding 

rotational speed); 

2. when the spindle is NOT at 1 st gear and assuming that the user command 

of the spindle S code command is smaller than (including equal to ) this 

parameter setting value, the system will inform PLC to shift the spindle to 

the 1 st gear; 

3. if no spindle gear shifting need, recommend to use the 4 th gear (C BIT 

097 – 099 are OFF) and set this parameter to 0. 

Need to pay attention to the following: NC only follow S code command from the 

user command of to determine the desired gear and then to inform PCL to 

execute gear shifting motion. If due to the spindle rotational speed OVERRIDE, 

which cause the actual rotational speed is over that gear range, then NC will 

NOT execute the above motion. 

1151 SPEED OF 2ND SPINDLE GEAR 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description this parameter is to determine whether or not to execute the 

: 

gear shifting motion according to the spindle S code command. 

1. when the spindle is at 2 nd gear and assuming that the spindle S code 



Parameter 

command from the user commanding of is larger than (not including equal 

to) this parameter setting value, or smaller than (including equal to) the 

setting value of parameter 1150 (gear shifting rotational speed of 1 st 

spindle gear), the system will inform PLC to execute the gear shifting 

motion (shifting to which gear is determined by the spindle commanding 

rotational speed); 

2. the spindle is NOT at 2 nd gear and assuming that the spindle S code 

command from the user command of is smaller than (including equal to) 

this parameter setting value and larger than (not including equal to) the 

setting value of parameter 1150 (gear shifting rotational speed of 1 st 

spindle gear), the system will inform PLC to shift the spindle to the 2 nd 

gear; 



Need to pay attention to the following: NC only follows the S code 

command from user command to determine the gear and then to inform 

PCL to execute gear shifting motion. If due to the spindle rotational speed 

OVERRIDE, the actual rotational speed is over that gear range, and then NC 

will NOT execute the above motion. 

1152 SPEED OF 3RD SPINDLE GEAR 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description this parameter is to determine whether or not to execute gear 

: 

shifting motion according to spindle S code command: 

1. when spindle is at 3 rd gear and assuming that the spindle S code 

command from user command of is larger than (not including equal to) this 

parameter setting value, or smaller than (including equal to) the setting 

value of parameter 1151 (gear shifting rotational speed of the 2 nd spindle 

gear), the system will inform PLC to execute gear shifting motion (shifting 

to which gear is determined by the spindle commanding rotational speed); 

2. when spindle is NOT at 3 rd gear and assuming the spindle S code 

command from user command is smaller than (including equal to) this 

parameter setting value and larger than (not including equal to) the setting 

value of parameter 1151 (gear shifting rotational speed of the 2 nd spindle 

gear). System will inform PLC to shift spindle to the 3 rd gear. 



Need to pay attention to the following: NC only follows the S code 

command from user command to determine the gear and then to inform 

PCL to execute gear shifting motion. If due to the spindle rotational speed 

OVERRIDE, the actual rotational speed is over that gear range, then NC 

will NOT execute the above motion. 

1153 1ST SPD MOTOR RPM OF GEARING 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 





Parameter 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

100 

RPM 

during spindle is shifting gears, when C BIT 126 is ON, the 

system will use this parameter to set the rotating speed to driver spindle 

motor. At this time, spindle rotational speed OVERRIDE does not work. 

1154 1ST SPD MOTOR RPM RANGE OF GEAR 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 50 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description assumed during spindle gear shifting procedure. Assumed C 

: 

BIT 126 is ON, if _the spindle motor actual rotational speed - parameter 1113 

setting value_is less than and equal to this parameter setting value, the system 

will set S BIT 094 to ON. 

1155 MAX SPEED OF 1ST SPINDLE GEAR 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 1000 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description assumed the spindle is at the 1 st gear, when the spindle rotational speed 

: 

(spindle S Code command * rotational speed OVERRIDE) is over this prameter 

setting value, the system will be restricted this parameter setting value. 

1156 MAX SPEED OF 1ND SPINDLE GEAR 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 2000 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description assumed the spindle is at the 2 nd gear, when the spindle rotational speed 

: 

(spindle S Code command * rotational speed OVERRIDE) is over this 

parameter setting value, the system will be restricted this parameter setting 

value. 



Parameter 

1157 MAX SPEED OF 1RD SPINDLE GEAR 

Range: 0 ~ 99999 



Default 3000 

value: 

Unit: RPM 

Description assumed the spindle is at the 3 rd gear, when the spindle 

: 

rotational speed (spindle S Code command * rotational speed OVERRIDE) is 

over this parameter setting value, the system will be restricted this parameter 

setting value. 



Parameter 

5.5 MPG Parameter 

15 AXIS.HANDLE FOR MPG DRY RUN 

Range: 1 ~ 19 



Default 6 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

this is used to set connection port number of the handwheel under MPG dry fun 

mode (works only in MEM or MDI modes). 

18 MPG MULTIPLIER MODE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description This parameter is to set the cutting axis acceleration/deceleration time under 

: 

Lathe-Tapping cutting command. The smaller the parameter value, the faster 

the cutting axis reaches the designated moving speed. However, it may cause 

vibration of cutting axis. 

In 486IPC(IPO is 5ms), max. value of this parameter is 1000. 

In 586IPC(IPO is 3ms), max. value of this parameter is 1000. 

When the setting value is less than IPO interval of the above restricted value, 

System Alarm【MOT 4056: Lathe-Tapping Acc/Dec Time (Para. # 0018) Setting 

Error】will occur. 



Parameter 

28 MPG X PORT 

75 MPG 4TH PORT 

87 MPG Y PORT 

88 MPG Z PORT 

Range: 1 ~ 19 



Default 6 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description under MPG mode, connection port number of X-axis MPG. 

: 



Parameter 

5.6 Compensation Parameter 

38 BACKLASH/PITCH COMP UNITS 

Range: 0 ~ 16 



Default 16 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

to set units for backlash compensation parameters (parameters 0044~ 0047) 

and pitch compensation parameters (parameters 0300 ~ 0349、0450 ~0499、 

0600 ~ 0649、0750 ~ 0799). 

44 X BACKLASH 

45 Y BACKLASH 

46 Z BACKLASH 

47 4TH BACKLASH 

Range: 0 ~ 32767 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description to set backlash compensation of X-axis. 

: 



Parameter 

112 NUM.SECS OF X.PICTH COMP 

113 NUM.SECS OF Y.PICTH COMP 

114 NUM.SECS OF Z.PICTH COMP 

115 NUM.SECS OF 4TH.PICTH COMP 

Range: 1 ~ 150 



Default 20 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

to set total section of X-axis pitch error compensation. The multiple product of 

this parameter setting value and parameter 1018(1019, 1020, 1021) setting 

value should be the total length of X-axis ball screw pitch error compensation. 

Now the max compensation section is 50 sections for each axis. 

117 ENABLE OF BACKLASH COMP(BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description BIT0: for X axis, 1 means to enable X-axis backlash compensation function; 0 

: 

means not to enable. 

BIT1:for Y axis, 1 means to enable Y axis backlash compensation function; 0 


BIT2:for Z axis, 1 means to enable Z axis backlash compensation function; 0 


BIT3:for 4 th axis, 1 means to enable 4th axis backlash compensation function; 0 


118 FLAG OF BACKLASH DIRECTION 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description BIT0:for setting X axis, 1 means pitch error compensation starts from –ive 

: 

direction X axis returns to the reference point; 0 means pitch error 

compensation starts toward +ive direction. 

BIT1:for setting Y axis, 1 means pitch error compensation starts from –ive 

direction Y axis returns to the reference point; 0 means pitch error 


BIT2:for setting Z axis, 1 means pitch error compensation starts from –ive 

direction Z axis returns to the reference point; 0 means pitch error 



Parameter 


BIT3:for setting 4 th axis, 1 means pitch error compensation starts from –ive 

direction 4 th axis returns to the reference point; 0 means pitch error 


119 ENABLE FLAG OF PITCH COMP 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description BIT0:for X axis, 1 means to enable X axis pitch error compensation function; 0 

: 


BIT1:for Y axis, 1 means to enable Y axis pitch error compensation function; 0 


BIT2:for Z axis, 1 means to enable Z-axis pitch error compensation function; 0 


BIT3:for 4 th axis, 1 means to enable 4 th axis pitch error compensation function; 

0 means not to enable. 

300 PITCH X COMP.001 




Range: -20000 ~ 20000 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

assumed pitch error on the nth section of X axis is M (um), the parameter 

#(300+N – 1) is set as M, parameter 0038 is set as 16. 

358 ENABLE THERMO DEFORMED CMP 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Turn off the thermal compensation function 

1:Turn on the thermal compensation function 



Parameter 

359 ALLOWANCE OF THERMO CMP INPUT 

Range: 1 ~ 1000 

Active: Instant Activity 


Default 1000 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description The maximum thermal compensation input amount allowed. 

: 

450 PITCH Y COMP.001 




Range: -20000 ~ 20000 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

assumed pitch error on the nth section of Y axis is M (um), the Parameter # 

(450+N – 1) is set as M, parameter 0038 is set as 16. 



Parameter 

600 PITCH Z COMP.001 




Range: -20000 ~ 20000 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

assumed pitch error on the nth section of Z axis is M (um), the Parameter # 

(600+N – 1) is set as M, parameter 0038 is set as 16. 

750 PITCH A COMP.001 




Range: -20000 ~ 20000 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

assumed pitch error on the nth section of Z axis is M (um), the parameter 

#(750+N – 1) is set as M, parameter 0038 is set as 16. 



Parameter 

811 SPIKE CMP G CODE 0)G2 G3 1)ALL 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description when parameter setting is 0, this means the spike compensation value, set by 

: 

using circular testing, can only be applied on G02/03 arch interpolation 

command. When it is 1, the spike compensation value can be applied on all 

moving G codes, which means as long as servo axis is doing reverse direction 

motion, the setting spike compensation value will be added. 

812 SPIKE +X CMP VALUE 

818 SPIKE +Y CMP VALUE 

828 SPIKE +Z CMP VALUE 

Range: 0 ~ 200 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

assumed doing the circular testing. When the spike value of +ive X axis 

direction is 0, this means NOT to enable the spike compensation function of 

+ive X-axis direction. 



Parameter 

813 SPIKE +X CMP TIME 

819 SPIKE +Y CMP TIME 

829 SPIKE +Z CMP TIME 

Range: 0 ~ 200 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

Please check the controller’s actual disconnecting time interval first and then set 

the desired value. Assumed doing circular testing. When set the spike time 

interval to 0, it means NOT to enable the spike compensation function of +ive 

X-axis direction. 

814 SPIKE +X CMP DELAY 

820 SPIKE +Y CMP DELAY 

830 SPIKE +Z CMP DELAY 

Range: 0 ~ 200 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 


the value. Assumed doing circular testing. Delay time interval between the spike 

point of +ive X-axis direction and the direction changing point. 



Parameter 

815 SPIKE -X CMP VALUE 

825 SPIKE -Y CMP VALUE 

831 SPIKE -Z CMP VALUE 

Range: 0 ~ 200 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

assumed doing the circular testing. When the spike value of -ive X axis direction 

is 0, this means NOT to enable the spike compensation function of -ive X-axis 

direction. 

816 SPIKE -X CMP TIME 

826 SPIKE -Y CMP TIME 

832 SPIKE -Z CMP TIME 

Range: 0 ~ 200 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 


the value. Assumed doing canned cycle testing. When set the spike time 

interval to 0, it means NOT to enable the spike compensation function of -ive 

X-axis direction. 



Parameter 

817 SPIKE -X CMP DELAY 

827 SPIKE -Y CMP DELAY 

833 SPIKE -Z CMP DELAY 

Range: 0 ~ 200 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 


the value. Assumed doing canned cycle testing. Delay time interval between the 

spike point of X axis -ive direction and the direction changing point. 

1018 COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.X 

1019 COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.Y 

1020 COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.Z 

1021 COMP DIST OF EACH SECTION.A 

Range: 0 ~ 99999999 



Default 30000 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

Assumed pitch error compensation interval is 10000μm of every X axis section, 

so please set this parameter to 1000. 



Parameter 

1046 START.X COMP POS 

1047 START.Y COMP POS 

1048 START.Z COMP POS 

1049 START.4 COMP POS 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

When the starting position of X axis pitch error compensation is 0μm(machine 

coordinate), please set this parameter to 0. 



Parameter 

5.7 Zero Return parameter 

19 WAY TO DEAL HOMING ON DOG 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:0:warning from the system in order to inform user to move away the servo axis. 

Then the system will execute the zero return procedure. Each axis warning 

message is as following: 

X Axis:【 MOT 0014 X axis is on HOME DOG】 

Y Axis:【 MOT 0015 Y axis is on HOME DOG】 

Z Axis:【 MOT 0016 Z axis is on HOME DOG】 

4 th Axis:【 MOT 0017 4 th axis is on HOME DOG】 

1:NC moves away the servo axis automatically (moves toward the reverse 

direction from the reference point). After getting away from DOG, it will execute 

home/zero return procedure. 

20 DEFAULT OF RETURN HOME FN.(BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:After turning on the machine, check if each axis is preset to having returned to 

reference point. 

Bit 0:X axis 

Bit 1:Y axis 

Bit 2:Z axis 

Bit 3:The 4 th axis 



30 OFFSET LENGTH OF X.ORG 

31 OFFSET LENGTH OF Y.ORG 

32 OFFSET LENGTH OF Z.ORG 

33 OFFSET LENGTH OF 4.ORG 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 





Parameter 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

0 

um 

Description:Assumed each axis moves N distance toward machine reference point. Setting 

this parameter to N if want to get the offset amount of N distance (um). Different 

setting value will change the reference point due to different offset amount. But, 

this setting value will NOT change the display coordinate after returning home. 

When the setting value is positive, it makes the machine home point of this axis 

moves away from DOG direction. 

When the setting value is positive, it makes the machine home point of this axis 

moves close to DOG direction. 

34 PAUSE TIME.X HOME SERACHING 

35 PAUSE TIME.Y HOME SERACHING 

36 PAUSE TIME.Z HOME SERACHING 

37 PAUSE TIME.4 HOME SERACHING 

Range: 100 ~ 2000 



Default 100 

value: 

Unit: 10 ms 

Description:the required dwell time that is set by this parameter can be used in the following 

three places: 

a. dwell time of decelerating stop when X axis moves toward the reference 

point in 1 st speed and reaches DOG. 

b. dwell time of decelerating stop when X axis gets away from DOG in 2 nd 

speed and finds motor INDEX. 

c. dwell time of decelerating stop when X axis returns back the desired motor 

INDEX position. 

48 DIRECT SET HOME POSITION 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:BIT 0: Setting 0 to indicate X axis re-searching HOME point method is 

re-searching DOG+ Index. 1 to indicate X axis re-searching HOME point 

method is force setting. 

BIT 1: Setting 0 to indicate Y axis re-searching HOME point method is 

re-searching DOG+ Index. 1 to indicate Y axis re-searching HOME point 


BIT 2: Setting 0 to indicate Z axis re-searching HOME point method is 

re-searching DOG+ Index. 1 to indicate Z axis re-searching HOME point 


BIT 3: Setting 0 to indicate the 4 th axis re-searching HOME point method is 

re-searching DOG+ Index. 1 to indicate the 4 th axis re-searching HOME point 



Parameter 


64 HOME DOG 0)NC 1)NO 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:this parameter works only when the home DOG sensor signal 

is connected to LOCAL INPUTS (Transit Board HS1 〜 HS4 connect 

points). (Parameter 0175 setting value is 0). If the home dog sensor signal 

is connected REMOTE INPUTS, then PLC ladder diagram program needs 

to change each axis home DOG signal state to C BIT 0031 〜 0035 in 

order to inform NC. 

76 ENABLE ABS SET AFTER HOMING 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:please refer to 1014 ~ 1017 for absolute coordinate setting 

value. After each servo axis returns home, display value of absolute 

coordinate is determined by following three points: 

a. setting value of parameters 1014 ~ 1017; 

b. 00 coordinated system, setting value of G54 ~ G59 coordinate system; 

c. setting value in G52 area coordinate system. 

⎛00 

coordinate value 

⎞ 

⎜ 

⎟ 

Para#1014 ~ 1017 value − ⎜+ 

G54 ~ G59 coordinate value ⎟ 

⎜ 

⎟ 

⎝+ 

G52 regional coordinate value ⎠ 

In addition, 

a. setting value of parameters 1014 ~ 1017: use this parameter to decide 

whether or not they are effective; 

b. 00 coordinate system, G54 ~ G59 coordinate system setting values: 

effective permanently; 

c. setting value in G52 area coordinate system: use parameter 0133 to decide 

whether or not it is effective. 



Parameter 

77 ENABLE NONE HOMING G00 OPR 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description: 

Parameter 77setting 

value 

is 1, G00 is effective 

before zero return 

G00 motion normally, 

each axis feedrate is 

MEM, MDI 

decided by the setting 

Automatic 

value of parameters 

mode 

1000 ~ 1003. 

JOG, RAPID 

Manual 

mode 

Under JOG, each axis 

feedrate is decided by 

the 

setting value of 

parameter 1100 ~ 1103; 

under RAPID, each axis 

feedrate is decided by 

the setting value of 

parameters 1000 ~ 1003. 

Parameter 77 setting value 

is 0,G00 is NOT effective 

before 

Return Home 

Automatically change G00 

motion to G01 motion, 

feedrate is the present F code 

designated value (use 

parameter 149 to set the 

default value). 

Motion of RAPID and motion 

of JOG, each axis feedrate is 

decided by the setting value of 

parameter1100 ~ 1103. 

79 ORG.X AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG 

80 ORG.Y AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG 

81 ORG.Z AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG 

82 ORG.4 AHEAD/BEHIND OF DOG 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:0:when reference point is behind DOG, after each axis reaches DOG, each axis 

will continue moving toward the same direction and look for the reference point; 

1:home position is ahead of DOG, after each axis reaches DOG, each axis will 

continue moving toward the reverse direction and look for the reference point. 



Parameter 

120 HOME DIRECTION OF AXIS 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:about home return direction, other than this parameter setting, PLC also needs 

to do the corresponding modification according to this setting. Home return 

procedure that is written by PLC of the controller machine version uses the 

home point is at +ive direction as the standard. 

Also, in the safety concern to prevent mistakenly touching, the direction 

signal will be sent out (using X axis as an example, which is C6) no matter 

which servo axis key ( ) that the user presses. So, under the condition 

that the home point is at the –ive servo axis direction, not only needs to set the 

corresponding BIT of this parameter to 1 but also needs to modify the 

orresponding returning home program in PLC. 

Use X axis as an example, the diagram of PLC return home procedure from 

+ive direction is as following: 

If X axis returns home at the –ive direction, other than setting this parameter 

BIT0 to 1, PLC modification is as following: 



Parameter 

175 HOME DOG FROM 0)LOCAL 1)REMOTE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:0:means the HOME DOG signal is connected LOCAL INPUTS (transit board 

HS1 ~ HS4), must setting the type of DOG signal to(parameter 0064); 

1:means the HOME DOG signal is connected REMOTE INPUTS, PLC must 

change each axis reference point DOG signal to the corresponding C BIT 

0031 ~ 0034(please refer to C BIT 0031 ~ 0034 for description). 

204 HOME POSITION RECORD BIT 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:BIT 0: 0 means when X axis is in Home point mode, the system must 

research Home point when executing return Home process. 

1 means when X axis is in Home point mode, the system uses NC record’s 

Home point when executing return Home process. 

BIT 1: 0 means when Y axis is in Home point mode, the system must 


1 means when Y axis is in Home point mode, the system uses NC record’s 


BIT 2: 0 means when Y axis is in Home point mode, the system must research 


1 means when Y axis is in Home point mode, the system uses NC record’s 



Parameter 


BIT 3: 0 means when 4th axis is in Home point mode, the system must 


1 means when 4th axis is in Home point mode, the system uses NC record’s 


208 REFERENCE MARKS OF LINEAR SCALE 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:For a servo axis that uses a linear scale with multiple reference marks, zero 

point return can be done manually by measuring the signal intervals between 

any 2 or 3 reference positions. (Please use parameter No. 0209 & 0210 to set 

other relevant actions). 

BIT0:1 Heidenhain’s linear scale with multiple reference marks is used for 

position feedback of X axis; 0 means not used. 


position feedback of Y axis; 0 means not used. 


position feedback of Z axis; 0 means not used. 


position feedback of the 4 th axis; 0 means not used. 

(Below is for 6-axis version) 





209 HOME RETURN FOR LINEAR SCALE 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:This parameter is only applicable to Heidenhain’s linear scale with multiple 

reference marks. When executing zero return manually, please use BIT defined 

as follows to set the numbers of reference mark signals that need to be checked 

for each axis. 

0:In manual mode, 3 reference marks must be checked to complete the zero 

return. 

1:In manual mode, only 2 reference marks have to be checked to complete the 

zero return. If this option is adopted, parameter No. 0210 must be set 

additionally. 



Parameter 

210 HOME POINT FOR LINEAR SCALE 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 


reference marks. Please use BIT to set the relative position of each axis’s 

machine zero point and the linear scale’s zero point (Only valid when the 

relevant BIT value to parameter No. 0209 is set to 1). 

0:Machine zero point is at the positive side of the linear scale’s reference mark; 

1:Machine zero point is at the negative side of the linear scale’s reference 

mark. 

293 ZRN BY DOG OR INDEX 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:BIT0:0 means X axis uses DOG for machine reference point reference and 1 

means X uses motor INDEX signal for reference. 

BIT1:0 means Y axis uses DOG for machine reference point reference and 1 

means Y uses motor INDEX signal for reference. 

BIT2:0 means Z axis uses DOG for machine reference point reference and 1 

means Z uses motor INDEX signal for reference. 



Parameter 

834 ABS. ENCODER READ TIME 

Range: 0 ~ 10 



Default 5 

value: 

Unit: s 

Description:To set time restriction of NC executes Encoder reading movement. 

1014 ABS COORD.X AFTER HOMING 

1015 ABS COORD.Y AFTER HOMING 

1016 ABS COORD.Z AFTER HOMING 

1017 ABS COORD.4 AFTER HOMING 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description:Assumed the desired X axis absolute coordinate is 300 um after home return, 

so the setting value must be 300. This parameter setting value only changes the 

coordinate display value after X-axis returns home. 

This will NOT change the actual machine position when X-axis returns home. 

So must set the parameter 0076 setting value to 1 for this setting to be effective. 



Parameter 

1022 X.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 

1023 Y.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 

1024 Z.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 

1025 4.OFF FOR ORG.2 REF TO ORG.1 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description:This parameter is to set the offset amount of the 1 st reference point 

corresponding to the 2 nd reference point of X axis. Assumed the desired 

corresponding offset amount of the 1 st reference point is 2000 um, so set the 

offset amount to 2000. 





Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description:this parameter is to set the offset amount of the 1 st reference point 

corresponding to the 3 rd reference point of X axis. Assumed the desired 

corresponding offset amount of the 1 st reference point is 2000um, so set 

the offset amount to 2000. 



Parameter 





Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description:this parameter is to set the offset amount of the 1 st reference point 

corresponding to the 4 th reference point of X axis. Assumed the desired 

corresponding offset amount of the 1 st reference point is 2000um, so set 

the offset amount to 2000. 

1098 ABS. ENCODER CHECK RANGE 

Range: 0 ~ 1000 



Default 30 

value: 

Unit: pulse 

Description:To set the max difference value that is between NC internal Encoder value and 

Driver Absolute Encoder value. Difference value that is between setting value of 

X axis Absolute Encoder (System Data #41) and NC internal value (System 

Data #32). Difference value that is between setting value of Y axis Absolute 

Encoder (System Data #42) and NC internal value (System Data #33). 

Difference value that is between setting value of Z axis Absolute Encoder 

(System Data #43) and NC internal value (System Data #34). Difference value 

that is between setting value of the 4th axis Absolute Encoder (System Data 

#44) and NC internal value (System Data #35). 

1104 1ST SPEED OF X HOMING 

1105 1ST SPEED OF Y HOMING 

1106 1ST SPEED OF Z HOMING 

1107 1ST SPEED OF C HOMING 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 




value: 

Unit: um/min 

Description:during each axis zero return procedure, moves toward this axis 

reference point in this parameter setting speed (set by parameter 0120). 

After reaching the home DOG, please use the 2 nd gear speed, which is set 

by parameter 1108 ~ 1111, to move and to search for motor reference point. 



Parameter 

1108 2ST SPEED OF X HOMING 

1109 2ST SPEED OF Y HOMING 

1110 2ST SPEED OF Z HOMING 

1111 2ST SPEED OF C HOMING 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 




value: 

Unit: um/min 

Description:during each axis zero return procedure, moves toward this axis 

reference point in Parameter #1104 ~ #1107’s setting speed. (set by parameter 

0120). After touching the home DOG, please use the 2 nd gear speed, which is 

set by this parameter, to move and to search for motor reference point. 



Parameter 

1118 ENABLE INDEX PROTECTED FUNCTION 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description:When the distance between the 1 st index and limit switch is less than 1/5 or 

more than 4/5 revolution of the encoder, grid protection function will activate so 

the next index mark will be used to make the distance between the 1 st index and 

limit switch over 1/2 revolution of the encoder if the distance in-between is less 

than 1/2 revolution. This function ensures that the zero point is always the 

original one. 

1171 SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF X AXIS 

1172 SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF X AXIS 

1173 SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF Y AXIS 

1174 SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF Y AXIS 

1175 SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF Z AXIS 

1176 SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF Z AXIS 

1177 SPACE1 LINEAR SCALE OF 4TH AXIS 

1178 SPACE2 LINEAR SCALE OF 4TH AXIS 

Range: 0 ~ 99999999 



Default 20020 

value: 

Unit: um 


reference marks. For the setting method, please go to the figure below for 

reference. 

10.02 

9.98 

10.04 

9.96 

Parameter No. 1171 

Parameter No. 1172 

Unit:mm 



Parameter 

1183 OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF X AXIS 

1184 OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF Y AXIS 

1185 OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF Z AXIS 

1186 OFFSET LINEAR SCALE OF 4TH AXIS 

Range: 0 ~ 99999999 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

This parameter is only applicable to Heidenhain’s linear scale with multiple 

reference marks. To change the set value of this parameter, please press 

RESET first and execute zero return manually again. By measuring 2 or 3 

signal intervals of the linear scale, NC can detect instantly the relative position 

between each axis’s current position and the linear scale’s zero point. If the two 

positions do not match each other, the shift between them must be defined by 

setting this parameter. 



Parameter 

5.8 Operation Parameter 

39 G92 IS CANCELLED AT G54~G59 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0:When program executes G54 ~ G59 coordinate selecting command, not to 

: 

cancel previous coordinate OFFSET amount which is caused by G92 

command. Not to cancel neither the designated command of absolute 

command (G90) nor OFFSET amount G54 ~ G59. 

1: When program executes G54 ~ G59 coordinates selecting command, 

cancel previous coordinate OFFSET amount which is caused by G92 command 

and also designated coordinate of absolute command (G90), which is for G54 ~ 

G59 coordinates ONLY. 



Parameter 

41 G00 LINEAR INTERPOLATION 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:for G00 command, each servo axis will move by its setting G00 speed, NOT 

to do compensation motion simultaneously. 

1:for G00 command, each servo does compensation motion simultaneously, 

the valid range is as following: 

a. G00 commands in MEM and/or MDI modes 

b. Same G00 motion commands under MEM and/or MDI modes, such 

as G27 ~ G30、G53; 

c. G00 and G53 commands of PMC axis function 

Final Pt. 

Y 

Starting pt. 

X 

Tool 

Z 

Parameter 0041 setting value is 0 

Final Pt. 

Y 

Starting pt. 

X 

Tool 

Z 

Parameter 0041setting value is 1 

42 COMMENT TYPE 0:/*...*/ 1:(...) 

Range: 0 ~ 1 




Parameter 

Level: 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

User 

0 

Nul 

Parameter No. 42 sets the annotation format for part programs. When 

parameter No. 42 is set to 0, the annotation format is /*……*/, and the functional 

format can either be (…) or […]. When parameter No. 42 is set to 1, the 

annotation format can be either /*……*/ or (………), but the functional format 

must be […]. 

43 FLAG OF EXACT CHECK 

Range: 0 ~ 127 


Level: User 

Default 16 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description Bit0:1 means X axis straight-line cutting (G01) of exact stop checking function 

: 

is canceled. 

Bit1:1 means Y axis straight-line cutting (G01) of exact stop checking function 

is canceled. 

Bit2:1 means Z axis straight-line cutting (G01) of exact stop checking function 

is canceled. 

Bit3:1 means 4th axis straight-line cutting (G01) of exact stop checking function 

is canceled. 

Bit4:1 means starting rapid traverse (G00) of exact stop checking function is 

canceled. 

For straight-line cutting command (G01), if want to enable the 

exact stop checking function, not only needs to set this parameter 

corresponding bit but also needs to order G09 command ( exact stop 

command, works for a single block), or G61 command (exact stop mode, 

permanently effective, so must use G64 command to cancel.) 

Once activating the exact stop checking function of G01 command, NC system 

will wait until each enabled servo axis enters into the checking windows range 

(parameters 0006 ~ 0009) after completed interpolation of any one of G01 

command, then it will execute the next single block. 

For the RAPID TRAVERSE command, G00, only need to set BIT 4 of this 

parameter to 1 in order to active the exact stop checking function. Under the 

condition that the exact stop function can be enable, NC system will wait until 

the actual position of each servo axis already enters into the checking windows 

range (parameters 0800 ~ 0803) after the interpolation is completed, then it will 

execute the next signal block. But if the former single block and the latter single 

block of a certain rapidly orientation command are both rapid traverse 

commands, then this rapid traverse command will NOT execute the exact stop 

checking. 

63 COORD.RLT SET WITH COORD.ABS 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 



Parameter 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

1 

Nul 

the valid range of this parameter setting value is as following: 

1. Reboot coordinate display value; 

2. After zero return procedure is completed, coordinate display value; 

3. G54 ~ G59 commands(work coordinate system selection); 

4. G92 command(coordinate value setting). 

71 INNER/OUTTER CHECK OF G22 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0:the embedded travel checking function that is set by G22 is the external 

: 

prohibit area. When there is command that will move the tool to outside of the 

setting range, the system alarm will be enabled. 

1:the embedded travel checking function that is set by G22 is the external 

prohibit area. When there is command that will move the tool to outside of the 

setting range, the system alarm will be enabled. 

About system alarm, please refer to the description of MOT 4058、9009 ~ 

9014. 

73 ENABLE G31 ACCELERATION 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:after G31 SKIP SIGNAL enters, immediately stop without decelerating; 

1 : after G31 SKIP SIGNAL enters, use parameter 0041 to set the 

acc/decelerating time in order to proceed stop in decelerating speed. 

74 ENABLE MACRO TRACE UNDER SBK 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Macro command (not NC command) Not execute single block; 

1:Macro command (not NC command) execute single block. 



Parameter 

78 ENABLE C AXIS TANGENT FOLLOW 

292 ENABLE C AXIS PATH FOLLOWING 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

When this function is enabled, C axis moving angle will move by following XY 

cutting line direction. 

83 ENABLE G00 UNDER DRY RUN 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: Under Dry Run, Motion of RAPID TRAVERSE Command 

Para #0083 

0 1 

Para #0041 Para #0041 

0 1 0 1 

RAPID mode (1) 

In MEM and MDI modes, G00 

command and/or motion with 

G00 command 

(2) (3) (1) (4) 

G00 and G53 commands of PMC 

axis function 

C23 OFF: 

(1) 

C23 ON: 

(1) 

C23 OFF: 

(3) 

C23 ON: 

(4) 

(1) (4) 

(1) Each axis moves according to its G00 speed. 

(2) Each axis moves according to its JOG speed 

(3) Each axis moving speed will NOT excess its setting JOG speed. 

(4) Each axis moving speed will NOT excess its setting G00 speed. 

89 M CODE ID OF PART COUNTER 

Range: 1 ~ 99 




Parameter 

Level: 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

User 

99 

Nul 

other than M02 and M03, users can use this parameter to set 

another working piece counter control of M code command. But, must 

avoid using normal M code commands, such as M00 (program stop), M01 

(optional stop), M3 (Spindle Positive Rotating) and est. Please refer to the 

program manual for a full detailed description of M code commands. 

When the program executes this M code, working piece will be added up 

at the POS page. At the same time, machine working time will return to 

zero automatically. If the adding-up sum of working piece is larger than 

the max sum of working piece which is set by users, the system will send 

out S BIT 134 signal to inform PLC. 

94 EDIT FILE O9XXX 0)N 1)Y 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description Set the edibility of files No. O9000~O9999, etc. 

: 

121 ESCAPE DIRECTION OF G76/G87 

Range: 0 ~ 3 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: Tool Escape Direction of Canned Cycle Commands 

(G76/G87) 

G17 G18 G19 

0 +X +Z +Y 

1 -X -Z -Y 

2 +Y +X +Z 

3 -Y -X -Z 



Parameter 

122 NAME OF AXIX.4 

Range: 0 ~ 5 



Default 2 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description Setting Value is 0, name of the 4 th Axis is A; 

: 

Setting Value is 1, name of the 4 th Axis is B; 

Setting Value is 2, name of the 4 th Axis is C; 

Setting Value is 3, name of the 4 th Axis is U; 

Setting Value is 4, name of the 4 th Axis is V; 

Setting Value is 5, name of the 4 th Axis is W. 

123 POWER ON METRIC/INCH SYSTEM 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description this parameter is to set the system starting unit after rebooting the system. 

: 

Please use G20 (inch command)/G21 (metric command) to exchange the 

system starting unit. 

124 POWER ON G00/G01 DEFAULT 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description This parameter is used to set the moving command after NC starts. After 

: 

entering into NC system, user needs to execute the following command under 

MEM or MDI mode: 

G91 X100. Y100. Z100.; 

When parameter setting value is 0, the above command equals to: 

G91 G00 X100. Y100. Z100.; 

When parameter setting value is 1, the above command equals to: 

G91 G01 X100. Y100. Z100.; 

129 G02 G03 ARC ERROR RANGE 

Range: 0 ~ 32767 




Parameter 

Level: 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

User 

5 

um 

When part programs execute G02 or G03, the system will check if the terminal 

position of an arc is on the circle described by starting point coordinates and 

center point coordinates. If the deviation between the arc’s terminal position 

and the circle exceeds the range set by parameter No. 129, the system will 

send a warning signal as [Illegal Radius]. 

When parameter is set to 0, the range to be checked is preset as 5um. 

130 AUTO CONTROL OF NUM PRECISION 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 【Example】Under the metric unit system, if set this parameter to 0, user will 

: 

order the following commands in MDI mode: 

G90G00X100F1000 

X axis moves 0.1mm position in 1mm/min speed 

G90G00X100.F1000. 

X axis moves to 100mm position in 1000mm/min speed 

If set this parameter to 1: 

G90G00X100F1000 


G90G00X100.F1000. 


131 COMPENSATION STARTING TYPE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:path compensation by using Type A; 

1:path compensation by using Type B. 

Please refer to program manual for the full detailed description of path 

compensation type. 

134 G83/G87 EXTRACT 0)ESCAPE 1)R 

Range: 0 ~ 1 




Parameter 

Level: 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

User 

1 

Nul 

0:Start point 

1:R point 

135 DEFAULTS OF G90/G91 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:setting absolute coordinate(G90)as the coordinate type when starting system 

1:setting incremental coordinate(G91)as the coordinate type when starting 

system. 

136 X SCALING IS EFFECTIVE OR NOT 

137 Y SCALING IS EFFECTIVE OR NOT 

138 Z SCALING IS EFFECTIVE OR NOT 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:invalid 

1:valid 

139 RADIUS COMP SYMBOL SET 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0:H code 

: 

1:D code 

this parameter is to set the path compensation code is either 

H code or D code. 

0 means the path compensation command is G41H1 

1 means the path compensation command is G41D1 



Parameter 

140 DISABLE RESET COMMON VAR CLR 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description there are 500 command variables and all level programs share these common 

: 

variables. The default value is VACANT for common variables @1 ~ @400 

when rebooting. But, whether or not clear means VACANT is decided by this 

parameter when press RESET. For common 

variables @401 ~ @500, remaining as the original value after pressing RESET 

key and also remaining power-discontinue memory. @0 means VACANT 

permanently. 

141 DISABLE RESET GLOBAL VAR CLR 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description there are 33 local variables and program in each level program has its own 33 

: 

local variables. Only need to end that level program to clear local variables of 

that level. Since pressing RESET key will return back to the main program level, 

the content of local variables in the main program level will use this parameter 

to set whether or not to clear when pressing RESET. If rebooting, local variables 

will be cleared no matter in which local level. #0 means VANCANT permanently. 

142 ABS/RLT ROTATION COMMAND 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:absolute value 

1:incremental value 

please refer to program manual for a full detailed description. 

143 CODE FOR SCALING 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 



Parameter 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

0 

Nul 

0:X, Y, and Z axis zoom in/out scale is set by P code command 

1:I, J, K code will set X, Y, and Z axis zoom in/out scale. In this case, each axis 

zoom in/out scale is set by parameters 1092 ~ 1094. 

Please refer to program manual for a full detailed description. 

145 DEFALTS OF PLANE XY/ZX/YZ 

Range: 0 ~ 2 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:after entering into the system, default setting is XY panel(G17) 

1:after entering into the system, default setting is ZX panel(G18) 

2:after entering into the system, default setting is YZ panel(G19) 

146 M CODE CALLING MACRO O9001 



Range: 0 ~ 99 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

O9001 is the automatic tool changing of MACRO program of the system. When 

the system executes to this parameter’s setting M code, it will call and execute 

MACRO program O9001, which is to change tool automatically. The setting 

value of this parameter must avoid all normal M code commands. Please refer 

to program manual for a full detailed M code command list. 

149 DEFAULTS VAL OF FEEDRATE 

Range: 0 ~ 32767 


Level: User 

Default 1000 

value: 

Unit: mm/min 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the default feedrate of the system under MEM or MDI 

mode. 



Parameter 

150 CLEANCE VALUE OF DEEP DRILLING 

Range: 0 ~ 32767 


Level: User 

Default 200 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description this parameter is to set the shrinking amount that everytime X-axis feed into a 

: 

constant value in G73 peak drilling command. The following shows the separate 

motion of a peak drilling command. Please refer to program manual for a full 

detailed description. 

Start 

○1 

○2 

R Pt. 

○3 

○ ○4 

○5 

Feed 

Amount 

Parameter 

0150 

○6 

○7 

○8 

○13 

○9 

○10 

○11 

○12 

Hole 

152 4TH AXIS OPTIMAL 

Range: 0 ~ 3 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 



Parameter 

Description 

: 

the following diagram shows when C axis moves from 300.000∘position to 

-150.000∘position, whether or not C axis takes into account the difference if 

take the shortest path: the path in means using the linear-type axis method of 

the rotatory axis. After completed, C axis coordinate display value is –150.000. 

The path in means to take the shortest path. When completed, C axis 

coordinate display value is 210.0000. 

Command of the 

NextCaxis-150.00 

0∘ 

○1 

+Y 

Present 

axis 

C 

○2 

+X 

155 FEEDRATE IS MM/REV OR MM/MIN 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description this parameter is to set the default unit of the cutting federate under MEM or 

: 

MDI mode, but this is not valid for the rapid traverse command (G00). 

0:using G95, under metric: unit is mm/rev; under inch: unit is inch/rev. In this 

situation, must match with the spindle rotating for the cutting command 

(G01/G02/G03) to be effective; 

1:using G94,under metric: unit is mm/min; under inch: unit is inch/min. 






166 G CODE CALLING MACRO O9010 



169 MACRO O9020 CALLED BY T CODES 

Range: 0 ~ 1 




Parameter 

Level: 

Default 

value: 

Unit: 

Description 

: 

Machinery Builder 

0 

Nul 

when NC executes this parameter’s setting M code, it will call and execute 

MACRO program O9004(O9005 ~ O9008、O9010 ~ O9012、O9020). Users can 

write the content of this MACRO themselves and then copy this file to the 

desired MACRO program menu (default: C:\[system path]\MACRO) in the 

system. The setting value of this parameter must avoid all normal M code 

commands. Please see program manual for the full detailed M code commands. 

170 MODAL UPDATE AFTER MDI TO MEM 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0:Yes, the changing modal of MDI mode does NOT work, all modals return 

: 

back to the default condition 

1:NO, the changing modal of MDI mode will continue to MEM mode. 

【Example】Assumed the setting value of parameter 0135 is 0 (the default 

system coordinate modal is G90 modal). After entering and executing the G91 

command under the MDI mode, MDI mode will change to MEM mode. If the 

parameter setting value of this parameter is 0: 

Executing 

G01X100.F1000. 

will move X axis to 100mm position in 1000mm/mm speed. 

If the parameter setting value is 1: 

Executing 

G01X100.F1000. 

will move X axis direct to 100mm position in 1000mm/mm speed. 

176 LOCAL PORT NO FOR G31 

Range: 1 ~ 2 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 1:G31 SKIP signal to 1 st LOCAL INPUT point(HS1 on Transit Board) 

: 

2:G31 SKIP signal to 2 nd LOCAL INPUT point(HS2 on Transit Board) 

G31 SKIP signal must be connected to LOCAL INPUT on Transit board. This 

parameter is to set connector point number. Since G31 signal must use LOCAL 

INPUT to latch absolute position record value of each axis, must use the 1 st and 

the 2 nd point of LOCAL INPUT. 



Parameter 

177 CONTACT TYPE OF G31 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:G31 SKIP signal is NC. When SKIP signal changes from 1 to 0, this G31 

signal block stops immediately and executes the next signal block. 

1:G31 SKIP signal is NO. When SKIP signal changes from 0 to 1, this G31 

signal block stops immediately and executes the next signal block. 

180 ENABLE MANUAL RETURN 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0:No 

: 

1:Yes 

Assumed the system is in MEM or MDI mode. If switching to JOG, MPG and/or 

RAPID modes during program executing, system will enter into 【Free Hold】. If 

user uses this manual function to move the machine from the initial program 

interrupting position and then continue executing the unfinished command in 

MEM or MDI mode, user has two choices. One is to move the machine back to 

the initial program interrupting position and continue the unfinished 

commanding, which is called MANUAL RETURN. The other one is to continue 

the unfinished commanding from the present position. But, there will be a 

OFFFET amount between the program path and afterward working path. Please 

refer the below diagrams for the difference between the above two methods. 

Manual Moving Path 

Program 

Actual 

Program 

Interrupt Point 

Enable MANUAL RETURN 



Parameter 

Manual 

Progra 

Actual 

Program 

Interrupt Point 

Disable MANUAL RETURN 

Other than using this parameter to set MANUAL RETURN function, C BIT 0004 

can also be used: 

If C BIT 004 is ON, it means enable MANUAL RETURN function. 

If C BIT 004 is OFF, it means disable MANUAL RETURN function. 

Moreover, if the Parameter #0180 is 1, MANUAL RETURN function will be 

enabled no matter C BIT 004 is enable or not. On the other hand, if Parameter 

#0180 is 0, C BIT 004 does matter whether or not to enable this function. 

187 FEED RATE CLAMPING 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:No 

1:Yes 

There will be a error amount ΔR between arch commanding and actual path. 

△R 

R 



Parameter 

2 

1 T 2 

Calculating formula is : ∆ R = ( + ) V . K 

2 p 

is position 

2K 

R 24R 

loop incremental. T is acceleration and deceleration time integer 

number. R is arch radius and V is the assigned feedrate. This 

formula is used only when the corresponding speed of speed loop 

is 3 ~ 10 times faster than position loop. 

Please also refer to description of Parameter 0188 and 0809 for 

detailed description. 

p 

200 FEEDRAT SHOW 0)CMD 1)ACTUAL 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:HMI panel displays feedrate commanding value 

1:system will calculate the actual feedrate according to each axis motor 

ENCODER (or linear scale) and then will display it on HMI panel. 

202 ENG/CHI/SIM LANG SETTING 

Range: 0 ~ 2 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:English 

1:Traditional Chinese 

2:Simplify Chinese 

205 REL/ABS COMP VALUE 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

Using this parameter to set the entering tool compensation value at OFFSET 

page, either absolute value or relative value. 



Parameter 

211 M CODE TO STOP INTERPRETER 










Range: 0 ~ 299 


Level: User 

Default 209 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

If some M code must wait for outside signals, it must be registered here to 

prevent any false action caused by pre-interpretation of part programs. 

221 DIGITAL FILITER FREQUECNY 

Range: 0 ~ 6666 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description Please go to the reference chart below for the valid ranges of digital filter 

: 

frequency. If the frequency is set between two ranges, NC will use the closest 

value as the filter frequency. For example, parameter No. 221 is set as 250 KHz 

while the actual filter frequency is 256 KHz. 

Filter 

Freq. 

(KHz) 

Filter 

Freq. 

(KHz) 

Filter 

Freq. 

(KHz) 

Filter 

Freq. 

(KHz) 

Filter 

Freq. 

(KHz) 

Filter 

Freq. 

(KHz) 

6667 256 131 81 53 28 

3333 247 128 80 52 27 

2222 238 126 79 51 26 

1667 230 123 78 50 

1333 222 121 77 49 

1111 215 119 76 48 

952 208 117 75 47 

833 202 115 74 46 

741 196 113 73 45 

667 190 111 72 44 

606 185 109 71 43 

556 180 108 67 42 

513 175 106 66 41 

476 171 104 63 40 



Parameter 

444 167 101 65 39 

417 163 100 64 38 

392 159 98 63 37 

370 155 95 62 36 

351 152 94 61 35 

333 148 93 60 34 

317 145 90 59 33 

303 142 88 58 32 

290 139 85 57 31 

278 136 83 56 30 

267 133 82 54 29 

223 AXES MANUAL RETURN(BIT) 

Range: 0 ~ 63 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description Bit 0 : Enable manual return function of X axis. 

: 

Bit 1 : Enable manual return function of Y axis. 

Bit 2 : Enable manual return function of Z axis. 

Bit 3 : Enable manual return function of the 4 th axis. 



Preset as 0: Enable manual return function of all axes. 

231 AXIS X INFORMATION HIDE 

232 AXIS Y INFORMATION HIDE 

233 AXIS Z INFORMATION HIDE 

234 AXIS 4TH INFORMATION HIDE 

Range: 0 ~ 3 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Show relative HMI information of X (Y, Z, the 4 th , the 5 th , the 6 th ) axis. 

1:Hide relative HMI information of X (Y, Z, the 4 th , the 5 th , the 6 th ) axis. 

2:Set by C Bit 0181(0182、0183、0184、0185、0186). OFF: Show;ON: Hide. 



Parameter 

249 RAMDISK ERR MSG 0)OFF 1)ON 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0: 當 RAMDISK 發生異常時 , 不顯示警告訊息。 

1: 當 RAMDISK 發生異常時 , 顯示警告訊息。 

350 JOG FRATE REF TO MDI F COMMAND 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 0:In JOG mode, the speed of each axis is always defined by parameters. 

: 

1:In JOG mode, the speed of each axis is preset by parameters. If executing F 

code in MDI mode, F code replaces JOG speed to set the speed of each axis 

until RESET is pressed. However, in JOG mode, the highest speed of each axis 

is still set by parameters. 

351 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE UNIT 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Cutting override feed rate = R016 register value* 10%; 

1:Cutting override feed rate = R016 register value* 1%。 



Parameter 

352 JOG OVERRIDE UNIT 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Jog override unit feed rate = R017 register value* 10%; 

1:Jog override unit feed rate = R017 register value* 1%。 

353 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE UNIT 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Rapid traverse override are F0, 25%, 50%, & 100%, respectively; 

1:Rapid traverse override = R018 register value* 1%。 

360 OPTION COLOR SET(0~3) 

Range: 0 ~ 3 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Screen color setting is not applied. 

1:Screen color setting is white words over a black background 

2:Screen color setting is black words over a white background 

3:Screen color setting is customized by users. 



Parameter 

361 BLACK COLOR SET(0~16) 

362 BLUE COLOR SET(0~16) 

363 GREEN COLOR SET(0~16) 

364 CYAN COLOR SET(0~16) 

365 RED COLOR SET(0~16) 

366 MAGENTA COLOR SET(0~16) 

367 BROWN COLOR SET(0~16) 

368 WHITE COLOR SET(0~16) 

369 GRAY COLOR SET(0~16) 

370 LIGHTBLUE COLOR SET(0~16) 

371 LIGHTGREEN COLOR SET(0~16) 

372 LIGHTCYAN COLOR SET(0~16) 

373 LIGHTRED COLOR SET(0~16) 

374 LIGHTMAGENTA COLOR SET(0~16) 

375 YELLOW COLOR SET(0~16) 

376 LIGHTWHITE COLOR SET(0~16) 

377 CURSOR COLOR SET(0~16) 

378 MARK COLOR SET(0~16) 

379 UP EDGE COLOR SET(0~16) 

380 DOWN EDGE COLOR SET(0~16) 

Range: 0 ~ 16 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

Only valid when parameter No. 0360 is set to 3. 

0:Not applied. 

1~16:Applied and change to the selected color. 

394 THE SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME 

Range: 0 ~ 9999 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 1. When the parameter is set to 0, the screensaver is not applied. 

2. 

: 

When the parameter is not 0, the screensaver activates automatically after 

the system is not operated for a specified amount of time (time length set 

by the parameter). If screensaver has not activated and some key is 

pressed, wait time will be counted from the last keystroke. If screensaver 

already activates, pressing any key will immediately terminate it, and wait 

time will be counted from zero. 



Parameter 

650 SET THE METHOD OF PROGRAM RESTART 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:Program restart definition 1 st . 

1:Program restart definition 2 nd . (Call O9888) 

806 MAX ALLOWANCE ERROR IN TURN 

Range: 0 ~ 32767 


Level: User 

Default 50 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description This parameter will affect the precision degree of work, the smaller the setting 

: 

value, the higher matching work sharp to the working program, but the longer 

working time needed. Also, because of machine setup, collusion and other 

relationships, it is possible that the machine position is not able to arrive the 

designated checking range, which means not able to finished this single block. 

Recommanding the smallest 

value is approximate 10um. 

808 ENABLE CORNNER ACC CONTROL 

Range: 0 ~ 2 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description If enable the corner decelerating function, the system will automatic control the 

: 

corner acc/decelerating speed between tool path which makes the path error 

within the allowable range (parameter 0806). 

809 MAX CIRCULAR ALLOWANCE ERR 

Range: 1 ~ 32767 


Level: User 

Default 30 

value: 

Unit: um 



Parameter 

Description 

: 

This parameter will affect arching precision degree. The smaller the setting 

value is, the better the result is but the longer the working hour. User must set 

the allowable error range according to the actual arch size. Recommending the 

minimum setting value is around 10μm. 

810 SET RIGID TAP IN G101~G105 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description When applying multi-hole drilling compound G code (G101 ~105), use this 

: 

parameter to set the tapping function. Set to 1: rigid tapping is activated; set to 

0, tapping is activated. The preset mode is tapping. 

848 X AXIS OPTIMAL 

849 Y AXIS OPTIMAL 

850 Z AXIS OPTIMAL 

Range: 0 ~ 3 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

This parameter is effective only for rotary axis. 

bit 0: Coordinate display method selection 

0: Display as Linear method. 

1: Display as one rotate 0.000~360.000 cycle method. 

bit 1: Coordinate display method is 0~360 cycle(bit 0 setting is 1), user is able 

to select whether or not the absolute command is handled as the shortest path. 

0: Calculate the shortest moving distance. 

1: Move according to commanding value. 

(Note)Incremental commanding is NOT handled as the shortest path at all. 



Parameter 

899 USE CE RULE 0)NO 1)YES 

Range: 0 ~ 1 



Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description 

: 

0:CE regulations are not applied. 

1:CE regulations are applied. 

1006 1ST X+ SOFT LIMIT 

1008 1ST Y+ SOFT LIMIT 

1010 1ST Z+ SOFT LIMIT 

1012 1ST 4+ SOFT LIMIT 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 




value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

This parameter is to set the limitation value of the +ive X-axis software travel 

limit. It works only after X axis is completed zero return procedure, or using the 

rebooting default value 99999.999 um. If this parameter setting value is smaller 

than parameter # 1007 (-ive X-axis software travel limit), it will enable the alarm 

system (MOT 4005, 1 st software traveling limit setting error). The +ive X axis 1 st 

and 2 nd software 

traveling limit is able to execute exchanging through C BIT 140. Please refer to 

the description of C BIT. Under the condition that the +ive X axis 1 st software 

traveling limit is enabled, when X-axis will excess the restricted range, it will 

enable the alarm system (MOT 9001 X-axis over the +ive software travel limit) 

or (MOT 4058 over the software travel limit). Please refer to the description of 

this warning message. 

1007 1ST X- SOFT LIMIT 

1009 1ST Y- SOFT LIMIT 

1011 1ST Z- SOFT LIMIT 

1013 1ST 4- SOFT LIMIT 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default -99999999 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

This parameter is to set the limitation value of the -ive X axis software travel 




Parameter 

rebooting default value 99999.999 um. If this parameter setting value is larger 

than parameter # 1006 (+ive X-axis 

software travel limit), it will enable the alarm system (MOT 4005, 1 st software 

traveling limit setting error). The -ive X axis 1 st and 2 nd software traveling limit is 

able to execute exchanging through C BIT 141. Please refer to the description 

of C BIT. Under the condition that the -ive X axis 1 st software traveling limit is 

enabled, when X axis will excess the restricted range, it will enable the alarm 

system (MOT 9002 X axis over the –ive software travel limit) or (MOT 4058 over 

the software travel limit). Please refer to the description of this warning 

message. 

1034 2ND X+ SOFT LIMIT 

1036 2ND Y+ SOFT LIMIT 

1038 2ND Z+ SOFT LIMIT 

1040 2ND 4+ SOFT LIMIT 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 




value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the limitation value of the +ive X axis software travel 


rebooting default value 99999.999 um. If this parameter setting value is smaller 

than parameter # 1035 (-ive X axis 

software travel limit), it will enable the alarm system (MOT 4023, 2 nd software 

traveling limit setting error). The +ive X axis 1 st and 2 nd software traveling limit is 


of C BIT. Under the condition that the +ive X axis 2 nd software traveling limit is 


system (MOT 9001 X axis over the +ive software travel limit) or (MOT 4058 over 


message. 



Parameter 

1035 2ND X- SOFT LIMIT 

1037 2ND Y- SOFT LIMIT 

1039 2ND Z- SOFT LIMIT 

1041 2ND 4- SOFT LIMIT 

Range: -99999999 ~ 99999999 



Default -99999999 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description 

: 

this parameter is to set the limitation value of the -ive X axis software travel limit. 

It works only after X axis is completed zero return procedure, or using the 

rebooting default value 99999.999 um. If this parameter setting value is larger 

than parameter # 1034 (+ive X axis 

software travel limit), it will enable the alarm system (MOT 4023, 2 nd software 

traveling limit setting error). The -ive X axis 1 st and 2 nd software traveling limit is 


of C BIT. Under the condition that the -ive X axis 1 st software traveling limit is 


system (MOT 9002 X axis over the –ive software travel limit) or (MOT 4058 over 


message. 

1091 PROTAG 

Range: -360000 ~ 360000 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: um 

Description this parameter is to set the default angle for G68 coordinate rotating command. 

: 

1092 PSCRT 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description when the setting value of parameter# 0143 is 1 (X, Y and Z axes zoom in/out 

: 

scale is determined by I, J and K of G51 zoom in/out scale command), this 

parameter is to set the default zoom in/out scale of X-axis. 



Parameter 

1093 PSCRT2 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 


: 


parameter is to set the default zoom in/out scale of Y-axis. 

1094 PSCRT3 

Range: 1 ~ 99999999 


Level: User 

Default 1 

value: 

Unit: Nul 


: 


parameter is to set the default zoom in/out scale of Z axis. 

1158 SHOW F2~F12 FOR FUN. KEY 

Range: 0 ~ 1 


Level: User 

Default 0 

value: 

Unit: Nul 

Description Because inconvenience could occur when operators use commercial PC 

: 

keyboard to operate controller, F2~F12 characters are shown on the function 

keys on the screen for users’ convenience during operation. 

1159 SET READ TIMEOUT TIMES 

Range: 0 ~ 30000 


Level: User 

Default 30 

value: 

Unit: sec 

Description If the time is too long when abnormal file reading of the controller happens 

: 

during machining, a new dialog box with warning messages will appear to notify 

users about the abnormal situation and also remind users to reset the system to 

ensure efficiency of the controller and the machine. 



SYSTEM ALARM and WARNING 

6 SYSTEM ALARM and WARNING 

When the system alarm message (ALARM) occurs, operation will stop. User must check 

the whole machine according to the alarm message. If able to solve problems, then only 

need to click RESET again to clear the condition. (However, if need to change parameter, 

then must exit the system software and then re-enter for the system to work.) 

Three types of alarm message which are MOT (MOTION) ALARM, OP 

(OPERATION) ALARM or INT (INTERPREATATION) ALARM. Definitions of the above 

alarm message are as following: 




6.1 OP OPERATION RELATED ALARM 

OP 

1001:X SERVO ALARM 

(1)Alarm message from X SERVO driver. 

(2)Please check ERROR message from the SERVO driver to know the cause. 

(3)Please re-booting. 

OP 

1002:Y SERVO ALARM 

(1)Warning message from Y SEVOR driver. 



OP 

1003:Z SERVO ALARM 

(1)Warning message from Z SERVO driver. 



OP 

1004:4 TH SERVO ALARM 

(1)Warning message from 4 th SERVO driver. 



OP 1005:X OVER TRAVEL (+) 

(1)X over travel (+) limit. 

(2)Click and hold OT(OVER TRAVEL)RELEASE and then use JOG to take away 

machine from the travel limit. 




OP 1006:X OVER TRAVEL (-) 

(1)X over travel (-) limit. 

(2)Click and hold OT(OVER TRAVEL)RELEASE and then use JOG to take away 


OP 1007:Y OVER TRAVEL (+) 

(1)Y over travel (+) limit. 

(2)Click and hold OT(OVER TRAVEL) RELEASE and then use JOG to take away 


OP 1008:Y OVER TRAVEL (-) 

(1)Y over travel (-) limit. 



OP 1009:Z OVER TRAVEL (+) 

(1)Z over travel (+) limit. 



OP 1010:Z OVER TRAVEL (-) 

(1)Z over travel (-) limit. 



OP 1011:4 TH OVER TRAVEL (+) 

(1)4 th over travel (+) limit. 

(2)Hold OT(OVER TRAVEL) RELEASE and then use JOG to take away machine 

from the travel limit. 




OP 1012:4 TH OVER TRAVEL (-) 

(1)4 th over travel (-) limit. 

(2)Hold OT(OVER TRAVEL) RELEASE and then use JOG to take away machine 

from the travel limit. 

OP 

1013:DETACH/ATTACH X-AXIS AS MOVING 

OP 

1014:DETACH/ATTACH Y-AXIS AS MOVING 

OP 

1015:DETACH/ATTACH Z-AXIS AS MOVING 

OP 

1016:DETACH/ATTACH C-AXIS AS MOVING 

OP 

1017:LNC SYSTEM EXPIRED 

OP 

1018:DESIRED MACRO VARIABLES NOT EXIST 

OP 

1019:DESIRED MACRO VARIABLES OVER RANGE 

OP 

1020:OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMITE 

OP 

1021:GEAR SIGNAL ERROR 

OP 

1022:DESIRED PARAMETER VARIABLES OVER RANGE 

OP 

1023:DESIRED PARAMETER VARIABLES NOT EXISTED 




6.2 OP OPERATION RELATED WARNING 

OP 6001:X AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6002:X AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 

OP 6003:Y AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6004:Y AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 

OP 6005:Z AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6006:Z AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 

OP 6007:4TH AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (+) 

OP 6008:4TH AXIS OVER MLC TRAVEL LIMIT (-) 




6.3 INT INTERPRETATION RELATED ALARM 

INT 3001:NO SUCH TOKEN 

(1)Part program enter data has invalid symbols or characters. 

(2)Modify program error. 

(3)Press RESET to clear the wrong warning message. 

INT 3002:GRAMMAR ERROR 

(1)Part program enter data has grammar error. 

(2)Modify program error. 


INT 3003:OUT OF NODE MEMORY 

(1)MACRO grammar has too complicat showing program such as too many 

brackets. 

(2)Simplify complexity degree 


INT 3004:EXECUTE NODE ERROR 

(1)System executes mathematics calculation that is not allow to execute 


INT 3005:FUNCTION ERROR 

(1)System executes invalid function that is not allow to execute.(Won’t happen 

under normal system condition.) 

(2)System error, please contact the supplier. 




INT 3006:DIVIDED BY 0 

(1)MACRO is divided by 0. 

(2)Modify numerator of the division. Must NOT be 0. 


INT 3007:VARIABLE OVER RANGE 

(1)One/some of local variables, common variables and global variables are out of 

range. 

(2)Modify variable numbers that are out of their number range. 


INT 3008:MACRO DOMAIN ERROR 

(1)MACRO function domain error. If square (SQRT) argument is negative or ATAN 

arguments are two zeros. 

(2)Modify domain. 


INT 3010:NOT ALLOWABLE DECIMAL POINT 

(1)NC address has not allowable decimal point. 

(2)Modify decimal point in NC address. 

INT 3011:WORD DATA OVER RANGE 

(1)NC address word data is out of range. 

(2)Modify word data in NC address. 

(3)Press RESET to clear wrong warning message. 

INT 3012:MACRO ILLEGAL MACRO PARAMATER INPUT(G、L、N、O、P) 

(1)Illegal arguments(G,L,N,O,P)in MACRO program. 

(2)Correcting these illegal arguments. 


INT 3050:TOOL DIAMETER IS 0 

INT 3051:ILLEGAL RPM GIVEN 

INT 3052:ILLEGAL FEEDRATE GIVEN 




INT 3053:( D ) EACH CUT DOWN DEPTH IS 0 

INT 3054:( H ) TOTAL DEPTH IS 0 

INT 3055:ESCAPE LOWER START POINT.Z 

INT 3056:( W ) EACH CUT WIDTH IS 0 

INT 3060:HOLES TOO DENSITY 

INT 3061:HOLES COUNT MUST>=2 

INT 3062:R MUST > Z 

INT 3070:WRONG DATA:R=0 

INT 3071:WRONG DATA:2RPHI 

INT 3073:WRONG DATA:Q=0 

INT 3074:WRONG DATA:V>=Q 

INT 3075:WRONG DATA:( PHI+2Q)>=2R 

INT 3076:WRONG DATA:I(J)=0 

INT 3077:WRONG DATA:I(J)-2R=I(J) 

INT 3079:WRONG DATA:2V+PHI>I(J) 

INT 3080:DISTANCE OF TWO CENTER IS 0 




INT 3081:WRONG DATA:2(R-V)



INT 3113:FILE NOT FOUND 

(1)File not found in the system. 

(2)Making/modifying the executing file. 


INT 3114:END OF FILE 

INT 3120:POST ERROR 

INT 3121:LACK OF SUB RETURN(M99) 

(1)No returning to the part program command in the sub-program. 

(2)Add returning back to the part program command in the sub-program. 


INT 3122:PROGRAM OVERFLOW(8) 

(1)Total numbers of calling Sub-program or MACRO is over the total level limit.(i.e., 

8) 

(2)Decrease numbers of calling program level. 


INT 3123:MACRO OVERFLOW(4) 

(1)Total numbers of calling MACRO is over the total level limit. (i.e., 4). 

(2)Decrease numbers of calling program level. 


INT 3124:MACRO UNDERFLOW(G67) 

INT 3125:WITHOUT LABEL 

(1)NO such LABEL . 

(2)Please check LABEL name. 

(3)Press RESET to clear wrong message error. 




INT 3126:BLOCK NOT FOUND 

(1)The designated BLOCK is not found. 

(2)Check whether or not the designated BLOCK is exist in part program. 


INT 3127:ILLEGAL LABEL 

INT 3128:FEEDRATE OUT OF RANGE, CHECK G94/G95 

(1)Check G94 and G95 are used correctly. 

(2)Check whether or not the FEEDRAT F value is too big. 

(3)Press RESET to clear the error and adjust G94, G95 and F value. 

INT 3130:COORDINATE ERROR 

INT 3131:UNKNOWN PLANE 

INT 3132:ILLEGAL RADIUS 

(1)Using G02, G03 arch cutting command, the final coordinate is NOT on the arch 

(2)Check the position of center point, direction and final point’s coordinate value 

(3)Press RESET to clear error. 

INT 3140:SEND TABLE ERROR 

INT 3141:NO FREE VARIABLES 

INT 3150:INSUFFICIENT DATA 

(1)Not enough executing G code data.(Lack of G10’s P,R,Z) 

(2)Supply the needed data. 


INT 3151:IP MAINTAIN ERROR 

INT 3152:CC R RETURN 

(1)Executing G27,G28,G29,G30 in the CANNED CYCLE. 

(2)Cancel the above G codes in CANNED CYCLE before executing. 





INT 3153:NO SUCH R POINT 

(1)Wrong reference point number in G30. 

(2)Modify the entered reference point number. 


INT 3154:ILLEGAL IN CC 

(1)Executing illegal motion in CANNED CYCLE. 

(2)Please cancel any illegal motion in CANNED CYCLE before executing. 


INT 3155:ILLEGAL PROFILE PATH 

(1)Illegal profile path in CANNED CYCLE (i.e., over cutting) 

(2)Please modify illegal profile path in CANNED CYCLE before executing. 


INT 3156:ILLEGAL G31 IN COMPENSATION 

INT 3157:G10 P CODE OUT OF RANGE 

INT 3158:G10 L/E CODE OUT OF RANGE 

INT 3160:DNC:INCORRECT READ SEQUENCE 

(1)Check whether or not there is incorrect sub-program or jump sequence from the 

part program. 

(2)Press RESET to clear wrong warning message, and modify part program. 

INT 3161:DNC:LOSS DATA PACKET 

INT 3162:DNC:PROGRAM BUFFER OVERFLOW 

(1)Program buffer overflow while DNC RS232 is transmitting program. 

(2)Check whether or not the connecting line is disconnect or fall. 

(3)Press RESET to clear wrong warning message or reboot. 

INT 3170:CUTTING LENGTH IN Z TOO SHORT 

INT 3171:CUT DOWN CHAMFER OVER RANGE 




INT 3172:CUT UP CHAMFER OVER RANGE 

INT 3201:COMP UNIT VECTOR 0 

(1)Compensation unit vector is 0. 

(2)System error, please contact supplier. 

(3)Press RESET to clear wrong warning message 

INT 3202:COMP START UP ARC 

(1)Compensating start-up is arch. 

(2)Please start compensating according to G00/G01. 


INT 3203:COMP CANCEL ARC 

(1)Compensating cancel is arch. 

(2)Please cancel compensation according to G00/G01. 


INT 3204:COMP LINE DET 0 

(1)DETERMINE values is 0. 

(2)Check part program. 


INT 3205:COMP VECTOR LENGTH 0 

(1)DETERMINE values is 0. 

(2)Check part program. 


INT 3206:COMP INTERFERENCE 

(1)Over cutting interference occurs. 

(2)Decrease compensation radius or modify part program pathway. 


INT 3207:COMP NO INTERSECTION 

(1)Not able to find the intersect points while calculating compensation value. 

(2)Decrease compensation radius or modify part program pathway. 

( 3 ) Press RESET to clear wrong warning message. 




6.4 MOT MOTION RELATED ALARM 

MOT 4001:X-AXIS ERROR COUNTER OVERFLOW 

(1)Motion board X- Axis ERROR COUNTER overflow(16-BIT). 

(2)Check or not the commanding speed is too fast. 

(3)Check whether or not servo motor is working normally. 

(4)Check whether or not the machine is running normally. 

(5)Check whether or not the board is normal. 

MOT 4002:Y-AXIS ERROR COUNTER OVERFLOW 

(1)Motion board Y-AXIS ERROR COUNTER overflow(16-BIT) 





MOT 4003:Z-AXIS ERROR COUNTER OVERFLOW 

(1)Motion board Z-AXIS ERROR COUNTER overflow(16-BIT) 





MOT 4004:4TH-AXIS ERROR COUNTER OVERFLOW 

(1)Motion board 4th-AXIS ERROR COUNTER overflow(16-BIT) 





MOT 4005:SET FIRST SOFT LIMIT ERROR 

(1)Error setting of 1st soft limit parameter (i.e., +ive soft limit is smaller than –ive soft 

limit) Please check parameter numbers 1006~1013. 

(2)Clicking RESET to set new parameter. 

(3)After changing the parameter, please reboot. 




MOT 4006:X AXIS SERVO LAG OVERFLOW 

(1)X Axis servo lag over parameter 0002 setting value. 

(2)Check whether the setting speed is too fast or the parameter 0002 setting value 

is too small. 

(3)Clicking RESET to continue operating. 

(4)If reset parameter, must reboot. 

MOT 4007:Y AXIS SERVO LAG OVERFLOW 

(1)Y Axis servo lag over parameter 0003 setting value. 


is too small. 



MOT 4008:Z AXIS SERVO LAG OVERFLOW 

(1)Z Axis servo lag over parameter 0004 setting value. 


is too small. 



MOT 4009:4TH AXIS SERVO LAG OVERFLOW 

(1)4th Axis servo lag over parameter 0005 setting value. 


is too small. 



MOT 4010:SPINDLE FEED FUNCTION ERROR 

(1)Checking spindle G25/G26 rotation speed. 

(2)Checking whether or not the setting values of parameter 57, 61 and 92 are 

correct. 

(3)Checking whether or not the spindle is working normally. 


(5)If change the parameter, need to reboot for the new setting parameter to be 

effective. 




MOT 4011:SPINDLE SPEED ERROR 

(1)Spindle shaking value is grater than parameter 97 setting value. 

(2)Checking whether or not the setting values of parameter 57, 61, 92, and 97 are 

correct. 

(3)Checking whether or not the spindle is working normally. 


(5)If change the parameter, need to reboot for the new setting parameter to be 

effective. 

MOT 

4012:NO FINAL LINE 

MOT 

4013:NO BLOCK 

MOT 4014:X AXIS ON HOME DOG 

(1)X Axis on HOME DOG. 

(2)Clicking RESET, use JOG to take the machine away from HOME DOG then will 

be able to return to the reference point. 

MOT 4015:Y AXIS ON HOME DOG 

(1)Y Axis on HOME DOG. 



MOT 4016:Z AXIS ON HOME DOG 

(1)Z Axis on HOME DOG. 



MOT 4017:4TH AXIS ON HOME DOG 

(1)4th Axis on HOME DOG. 



MOT 4018:NO RETURN HOME 

(1)Not return to the reference point after rebooting. 

(2)Clicking RESET and return to the reference point first. 




MOT 4019:OVER TRAVEL 

(1)Machine over travel problem. 

(2)Solving the problem according to alarm message (OP 005~0012). 

MOT 

4020:NO RESIDUE DATA 

MOT 

4021:STOP POSITION ERROR 

MOT 4022:FIRST SOFT LIMIT ERROR 

(1)Over 1 st soft limit. (Please refer to G10 in program manual.) 

(2)Please checking setting values of parameters 1006 ~ 1013. 

(3)Clicking RESET to continue operating from the reverse direction. 

MOT 4023:SET SECOND SOFT LIMIT ERROR 

(1)Maximum parameter value of the 2 nd soft limit is smaller than the smallest value. 

(2)Checking parameters 1034~1041. 

(3)Reset parameter and then reboot. 

MOT 4024:SECOND SOFT LIMIT ERROR 

(1)Over 2 nd soft limit. 

(2)Checking parameters 1034~1041. 

(3)Click RESET to continue operating. 

MOT 4025:G10 P RANGE ERROR 

(1)P value is over range. 

(2)Please checking the part program. 

MOT 4026:ENCODER A,B PHASE ERROR 

(1)ENCODER disconnect or 5V power problem 

(2)Checking whether or not the ENCODER or power port is connected. 

MOT 4027:HOME DOG TOO SHORT 

(1)Check whether or not HOME DOG is too short or the speed is too fast. 

(2)Extend DOG or slow down the zero return speed. 

MOT 

4028:SET PARAM 39 ERROR 




MOT 

4029:SET PARAM 23 ERROR 

MOT 4030:SET PARAM 14 ERROR 

(1)Parameter #14 setting error. 

(2)Re-set parameter and re-boot. 


(1)Parameter #10setting error. 



(1)Parameter # 11 setting error. 








MOT 4035:SET CMR ERROR 

(1)Setting CMR error 

(2)Checking Para. # 0053 ~ 0056,0067 ~ 0070,0072,0100 ~ 0107,1112 ~ 1115. 

(3)Re-setting parameter and re-booting. 

MOT 4036:SET IN POSITION CHECK ERROR 

(1)Setting position check error. 

(2)Checking Para. # 0006 ~ 0009. 


MOT 4037:SET DMR ERROR 

(1)DMR setting error. 

(2)Checking whether or not the setting value is over setting parameter 53~57 range. 





MOT 4038:SET ENCODER PULSE/REV ERROR 

(1)Setting motor ENCODER pulse/rev error. 

(2)Checking whether or not the setting value is over setting parameter 1112~1115 

range. 


MOT 4039:HOME LOW SPEED ERROR 

(1)2 nd home speed setting error. 

(2)Checking whether or not the setting value is over setting parameter 1108-1111 

range. 


MOT 4040:X CMP NO. ERROR 

(1)Pitch compensation section setting error. 

(2)Checking Parameter # 0112 range. 


MOT 4041:Y CMP NO. ERROR 




MOT 4042:Z CMP NO. ERROR 




MOT 4043:4TH CMP NO. ERROR 




MOT 4044:CMP INTERVAL ERROR 







MOT 4045:NO INDEX INTERRUPT 

(1)Reference point index disconnect signal error or HOME DOG too short. 

(2)Checking connection for motor to servo. 

MOT 4046:RETURN HOME FAILURE 

(1)Checking whether nor not machine lock or other machine problems. 

(2)Press RESET to clear the condition. 

MOT 4047:I/O COMMUNICATION ERROR 

(1)Checking I/O board 

(2)Checking all connectors on I/O board. 

MOT 

4048:SPINDLE ORITENTATION SIGNAL NOT RELEASE 

Assumed executing machine adjustment and orientation. If initially, the spindle is 

positioned on the sensor, the spindle will move away automatically. After the orientation 

signal is off, user will be able to execute machine adjustment or orientation. However, if the 

spindle already rotates one cycle but the orientation signal has not been released, then 

this alarm message will occur. 

(1)Checking whether or not there is connection problem on the spindle orientation 

sensor. 

(2)Checking whether or not the spindle orientation sensor signal and type setting is 

correct (Parameter # 184). 

(3)Checking whether or not the spindle orientation sensor is broken. 

MOT 

4049:SPINDLE ORITENTATION FLAUT 

When executing spindle orientation, the spindle is NOT able to reach the correct 

orientation point. 

(1)Please go to DGNOS page. If the data system NO. 10 is changing, but the 

spindle is not rotating. Then, it means the spindle motor ENCDER signal has 

external distribution that makes the system misunderstood. 

(2)Please check whether or not the setting orientation rate is too high by parameter 

NO. 21 that makes spindle motor has missing step in the Pulse Mode. 




MOT 

4050:SPINDLE ORITENTATION SIGNAL NOT FOUND 

Assumed the spindle has rotated one time already but it hasn’t found the orientation 

position sensor while executing machine adjustment or while orientation program is 

running. The following alarm messages will occur. 

(1)Checking whether or not there is connection problem on the spindle orientation 

sensor 

(2)Checking whether or not the spindle orientation sensor signal and type setting is 

correct (Parameter # 184). 

(3)Checking whether or not the spindle orientation sensor is broken. 

MOT 4051:NO SPINDLE SPEED DEFINE 

No spindle speed definition. So please define rotary command in rigid tapping. Please 

key-in rotational speed command S before tapping command. 

MOT 4052:MOVE ERR OVER LIMIT IN RIGTAP 

(1)Please check whether or not the procedure of rigid machine adjustment is 

completed. 

(2)Please check whether not the setting value of Parameter 1058 is too small. 

MOT 4053:SPD SPEED WILL OVER LIMIT 

(1)Please check whether or not the setting spindle rotational speed is over the 

maximum speed that this gear spindle can handle. 

(2)Please check whether or not the setting of Parameter NO. 1060 for the spindle 

return accelerating speed is too big under rigid tapping. Unless necessary, 

recommend setting to 100. 

MOT 4054:Z AXIS FEEDRATE WILL OVER LIMIT 

Z axis cutting feedrate speed of rigid tapping is larger than the maximum cutting 

speed that is set by Parameter 1004. 

(1) Checking whether or not Parameter NO. 1060 has set the spindle returning 

accelerating speed too large under rigid tapping. If speed starts to accelerate 

while returning (i.e., P1060 > 1000), then speed of cutting spindle will 

accelerate too. Unless necessary, recommend to set 100. 




MOT 4055:SPD SERROLAG OVER LIMIT IN RT 

(1) Please check whether or not ladder has error. 

(2) Please check whether or to the spindle is rotating in rigid tapping procedure. If 

not, please check whether or not there is problem for the spindle driver setting. 

(3) Please check whether or not the spindle Encoder line is discount or fall. 

(4) Please check whether or not the setting of Parameter 1075 is too small. 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

4056:SET PAR 18 ERROR 

4057:SPINDLE SPEED CAN'T ARRIVE 

4058:OVER SOFTLIMIT 

4061:THREAD CUT FEED OVERLIMIT 

4062:X-AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER VALUE OUT OF TOLERANCE 

4063:X AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER TRANSMISSION OVER TIME 

4064:X AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER CHECK SΜM ERROR 

4065:Y-AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER VALUE OUT OF TOLERANCE 

4066:Y AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER TRANSMISSION OVER TIME 

4067:Y AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER CHECK SΜM ERROR 

4068:Z-AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER VALUE OUT OF TOLERANCE 

4069:Z AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER TRANSMISSION OVER TIME 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

4070:Z AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER CHECK SΜM ERROR 

4071:4TH-AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER VALUE OUT OF TOLERANCE 

4072:4TH AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER TRANSMISSION OVER TIME 

4073:4TH AXIS ABSOLUTE ENCODER CHECK SΜM ERROR 

MOT 4074:M CODE REPEAT ASSIGN,CHECK PARAMETER 89,835,836,837 




MOT 

MOT 

MOT 

4075:TOUCH DIRECTION SIGNAL READ ERROR 

4076:TOUCH SIGNAL IS TRIGGERED IN MANUAL MEASURE STATUS 

4077:NO SEMI-FIXED M CODE 

MOT 4101:TOOL POSITION INTERFERENCE 

(1)In OPR mode, tool position and setting value NOT match. 

(2)Moving away tool or re-enter data 

(3)Pressing RESET. 

MOT 

4102:INPUT DIGTS RANGE ERROR 

MOT 

4103:AUTHORIZATION CHECK FAILURE 

Please contact technical person. 

MOT 

4121:X AXIS COMMANDED UNDER DETACHED 

MOT 

4122:Y AXIS COMMANDED UNDER DETACHED 

MOT 

4123:Z AXIS COMMANDED UNDER DETACHED 

MOT 

4124:4TH AXIS COMMANDED UNDER DETACHED 

MOT 

4125:SPINDLE POSITIONING ACC/DCC TIME SETTING ERROR 

MOT 

4901:SYSTEM ALARM 

MOT 


MOT 


MOT 


MOT 


MOT 9001:X AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (+) 




MOT 9002:X AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (-) 

MOT 9003:Y AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (+) 

MOT 9004:Y AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (-) 

MOT 9005:Z AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (+) 

MOT 9006:Z AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (-) 

MOT 9007:4TH AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (+) 

MOT 9008:4TH AXIS OVER SOFTLIMIT (-) 

MOT 9009:X AXIS OVER G22 SOFTLIMIT (+) 

MOT 9010:X AXIS OVER G22 SOFTLIMIT (-) 

MOT 9011:Y AXIS OVER G22 SOFTLIMIT (+) 

MOT 9012:Y AXIS OVER G22 SOFTLIMIT (-) 

MOT 9013:Z AXIS OVER G22 SOFTLIMIT (+) 

MOT 9014:Z AXIS OVER G22 SOFTLIMIT (-) 

MOT 

9015:OVER CUTTING FEED START SIGNAL WAITTING 



Machine Adjustment 

7 Machine Adjustment 

7.1 Milling Rigid Tapping Commanding 

Description: 

• G94(G95) 

Mode 

Thread Pitch 

Calculation 

F_ Unit 

G94 F_ / S_ mm/min 

G95 F_ mm/rev 

• G98、G99 

G98 : Returning back to the initial height. 

G99 : Returning back to R point. 

• G84(G74)X_Y_Z_R_P_F_K_: 

G84:Right helical. 

G74:Left helical. 

X_Y_:Tapping position. 

Z_:Tapping’s lowest point (hole bottom). 

R_:Tapping’s starting point. 

P_:Tapping’s stop time. 

F_:Tapping’s Z axis feed speed(G94)or pitch(G95). 

K_:Repeating tapping numbers. 

Example: 

G94(G95); 

M29 S_; 

// To set Feedrate unit. 

// To enable rigid tapping mode and to command spindle to the 

desired rotational speed. 

G98(G99)G84(G74)X_Y_Z_R_P_F_K_; 

G80; // or Group 0 commands(G00、G01、G02、G03), disable 

rigid mode. 




• Returning acceleration function 

Setting parameter 1060, which will be able to accelerate the Z axis returning speed 

under rigid tapping and to decrease working time. 

• Override 

Under rigid tapping, Feed Override and Spindle Speed Override will be disabled. 

• MLC Rigid Tapping C BIT 

C BIT SYMBOL Description 

C125 RT START 

When C125 is ON, it will inform NC to start rigid tapping mode. 

MLC needs to wait until NC S128 = ON and then to disable 

C125. 

C124 RT STOP 

Disable rigid tapping mode. 

Under normal situation, rigid tapping mode will be disabled 

automatically after reading G80 or Group 1’s G code. If there is 

special need, please set bit to ON and then rigid tapping will be 

disabled automatically. 

S128 RT STATE 

Rigid Tapping Mode Status 

When NC enters into the rigid tapping mode, S128 remains ON 

until it exits rigid tapping mode. If user press RESET under rigid 

tapping, NC will set S128 OFF. 

Notice: When user press RESET, please disable rigid tapping mode in order to prevent 

any unpredicted situation. 

• Rigid Tapping System Information 

Rigid Tapping 

System 

Information # 

Description 

#21 Max error in rigid tapping travel 

#22 

#23 

#24 

#25 

Estimate value of rigid tapping 1 st speed 

compensation value 

Estimate value of rigid tapping 1 st 

acceleration speed compensation value 

Estimate value of rigid tapping 2 nd speed 

compensation value 

Estimate value of rigid tapping 2 nd 

acceleration compensation value 

#26 Rigid tapping spindle following error 




• Rigid Tapping Machine Adjustment Procedure 

1. Please increase the maximum allowable following error of Z axis direction (Para. # 

1058 is approximately set to 3000). Also increase the maximum servo error of the 

spindle (Para. # 1075 is approximately set to encoder size per rotation of the 

spindle*10) in order to prevent warning when doing machine adjustment. 

2. Confirm Spindle Rotational Direction(Para. # 1071) 

Executing the following program: 

M29S500 

G91G84R-10Z-50F500 

M28 

M30 

Check whether or not the spindle rotational direction is the same direction as M3 

direction under non-rigid tapping mode. If not the same, please set Para. # 1071 to 1. 

3. Acc/Deceleration Time Adjustment 

To adjust acc/deceleration time (parameter 1059) and execute the following program: 

M29S2500 ; rotational speed setting is the maximum rigid tapping speed. 

G91G84R-10Z-50F2500 

M28 

M30 

During executing, must make the spindle drive device’s current lower than the 

saturation value, and make the spindle to turn smoothly. 

Please pay attention to whether or not the needed maximum rotational speed can be 

reached at the upper enter frequency limit of the spindle. Using Toshiba as an example, 

adjust Para. # 373, 425, 426, 427, and 428. 

If the spindle rotational speed is not smooth in high rotational speed, please refer to 

Para. # 371. 




4. Speed Compensation 

a. Please set parameters 1064、1065、1073、1074 to zero and reboot the system after 

modifying. 

b. Executing the following program in dry run one time (no need to put on any material) 

M29S2500 

G91G84R-10Z-50 F2500 P1000 

M28 

M30 

To observe system data #22, and to enter this value into speed compensation 

parameter 1064. This value should be between 100~8000. After entering system 

data #24 into parameter 1073 (S22 → P1064,S24→P1073), reboot the system. 

c. Executing the above part program again. If there is any shaking, please adding 

parameter 1066 from 0 to 20 in order to decrease shaking. This value shouldn’t be 

as too big as possible, or the following error will increase. Recommending value is 

between 3~5. 

5. Acceleration Speed Compensation 

a. Executing Step 4 program one more time, enter system data # 23 and #25 

separately into acceleration speed compensation parameter 1065 and 1074 and 

then reboot the system. This value should be between 100~8000. 

b. If shaking occurs, please adding parameter 1070 from 0 to 20 in order to decrease 

shaking. Recommending value is 10~15. 

c. After completed, please observe system data #21. This is the biggest error of Z axis 

direction during tapping. 

6. Servo Error Amount Checking 

a. Reset Para. # 1058 as the allowable error amount and it must be larger than system 

data #21. Recommend setting this value as 5 – 10 times larger than system 

parameter 21. During rigid tapping, when the error is over this setting value, tapping 

will stop. 

b. Using the same principle to set Para. # 1075 as the allowable error amount for the 

spindle servo. Recommend to set this value as 5-10 times larger than the system 

parameter #26. During rigid tapping, when the error is over this setting value, 

tapping will stop. 




7.2 Laser Compensation Procedure 

R(MAC Coord.) 

1 

-X 

2 

3 

4 5 

Total Length = ABS(Q) * K 

K+3 

Arg. U to Decide Effective or Not 

K+4 

E(Cancel Distance of Backlash) 

Q(Each Section Measurement) 

K+5 

2K+5 

K+7 

K+6 

:Repaidly Ori. G00 

E(Cancel Distance of Backlash) 

:Linear Inter G01 

:Pro. Pause M0 

:Stop G04 

:Pro. Finish 

Program Argument Description 

1. A:Axis direction, 1 means X axis, 2 means Y axis and 3 means Z axis. 

2. E:Delete backlash moving distance. If it is a positive value, at beginning of 

measuring, the program should move ABS(E)distance toward this axis 

positive direction. Then moving ABS(E)distance toward negative direction 

(Step 2 and Step 3 from the above Diagram). After measuring forward direction, 

first moving ABS(E)distance toward negative direction and then moving ABS 

(E)distance toward positive direction (Steps K+4 and K+5 from the above 

diagram). If it is a negative value, then using the opposite method. So, if this 

axis pitch error compensation direction is positive, then this argument must be 

set as negative value. If it is a negative direction compensation, then this 

argument must be set as positive. 




To delete backlash motion is to execute G01 and the feedrate is constant to 

800mm/min. In order to catch the first point of Backward direction (which 

equals to the last point of the Forward direction, final point of Step K+3 or the 

starting point of Step K+6), so the setting value of this argument should be 

bigger than the setting value of Laser measuring software (such as 

RENISHAW, HP and etc). If not, Step K+4 and Step K+5 should stop for a 

while. 

3. K:Measure section, this argument value must be the same as the total section 

setting value of the pitch error compensation (Parameters 0112 – 0115) for the 

corresponding axis direction in NC system. 

4. Q:Each section’s measuring length. If it is positive direction compensation, 

please set setting value as positive value. If it is negative direction, please set 

setting value as negative value. This argument value must be the same as 

each pitch error compensation distance’s setting value for the corresponding 

axis in NC system. (Parameters 1018 – 1021, NC system parameter values 

are positive permanently. Parameter 0118 will set the compensation 

direction.) 

5. R:Measure starting coordinate (machine coordinate), this argument value must 

be the same as the starting position’s setting value of pitch error 

compensation (Parameters 1046 – 1049) for the corresponding axis direction 

in NC system. 

6. T:For each section’s pause time, unit is sec. 

7. U:When the setting is 1, after executing K+4 Step, pause argument 

T will continue moving toward the reverse direction at the desired time. When 

the setting is 0, pause argument T will continue moving toward the reverse 

direction immediately after executing K+4 Step. Please refer to Argument E 

for a description. 




Executing Steps 

1. Check NC parameter 0038 (Backlash and pitch error compensation unit) setting value 

is correct or not. 

2. Correct O0000 content and modify each argument’s (E, K, Q, R) corresponding NC 

parameter setting value. 

3. Disable backlash or pitch error compensation function (Parameters 0117 and 0119); 

reboot system. 

4. Executing reference point procedure. 

5. After resetting laser measure software (such as RENISHAW、HP and est.), executing 

O0000 program and measuring the error amount of each section’s compensation 

length. The measure result is as below: 

Error 

Backward 

Backlash 

Forward 

Dist. 

6. Putting the measured backlash(From the upper diagram, the vertical difference 

between two lines)into NC parameter(Parameters 0044 ~ 0047), and enable the 

backlash function(Parameter 0117); reboot the system. 




7. After looking for the reference point, re-executing Step 5 and the measure result 

should be as following: 

Error 

Backward 

Forward 

Dist. 

8. Setting pitch error compensation values(NC Parameters 0300 ~ 0349、0450 ~ 

0499、0600 ~ 0649 and 0750 ~ 0799). Assumed the LNC system pitch error 

compensation value uses the relative value setting. If the laser measure software 

(such as RENISHAW, HP, and est.) able to execute exchanging, there will be no 

problem. But, if can only use the absolute value to indicate, the exchanging 

method is as following: 

The N th section relative error = the N th section absolute error – the (N-1) th section 

absolute error; 

The N th section compensation setting value = -ive N th section relative error. 

Starting Point 

Ideal Time Interval, 

20mm 

Ideal:20.000 

Meausre:20.002 

Actual:20.002 

Abs. Error:0.002 

Rel. Error:0.002 

Para. Set:-0.002 

Ideal:40.000 


Actual:19.999 


Rel. Error:-0.001 

Para. Set:0.001 

9. After rebooting the system, re-executing Step 7 until the compensation effect is 

within the acceptable range. 

Ideal::60.000 


Actual:20.000 


Rel. Error:0.000 


Ideal::80.000 


Actual:19.997 

Abs. Error:-0.002 

Rel. Error:-0.003 





7.3 Double Ball Bar Measure – Backlash or Circular Spike 

• Backlash 

Using DOUBLE BALL BAR to measure backlash, the result analyzing diagram is as 

following (only the Y axis part, which is called Positive Backlash). Able to see the Y 

axis backlash is 14um from the diagram. So please set this value (i.e., 14um) into 

Para. # 0045 and set BIT1 of Para. # 0117 to 1 in order to enable Y axis backlash 

compensation function. 

• Reversal Spikes 

Using DOUBLE BALL BAR to executing canned cycle testing, the result analyzing 

diagram is as below. In the diagram, the sticking out path in the direction changing 

area of each axis is called the circular spikes phenomenon. 




Using +ive X axis direction as an example, each related parameter setting for circular 

spikes compensation value is as following: 

1. Parameter 0812:+ X Axis Direction of Reversal Spikes Value 

Unit:um 

Description: This parameter is to set the circular compensation value of +ive X axis 

direction. Using the above diagram as an example. The +ive X axis direction circular 

spike is 11. So based on the principle, the parameter setting value is 11. However, 

since the present LNC series controller is using PULSE COMMAND control mode 

(spike compensation is added to CURRENT LOOP value), there will be some delay 

between the actual corresponding of servo motor and the commanding value. Based 

on past experience, the circular compensation value should be set as 8-9 times of the 

actual value. So according to the result from the above diagram, the recommend 

setting value for this parameter is 90. If this parameter setting value is 0, it means not 

to enable the + X axis spike compensation function. 

2. Parameter 0813: Reversal Spikes Time Interval of +ive X Axis Direction 

Unit: disconnecting time interval 

486IPC is 10.6ms 


Description: To use this parameter to set the maintaining time of +ive X axis direction 

spike compensation. The corresponding +ive X axis spike maintaining time (spindle 

width) is displayed on the result analyzing diagram. The measure software will provide 

each measured Sampling Rate. Using RENISHAW as an example,【Sample: 7.81 per 

sec information will be displayed on the left side of analysis diagram. This means the 

time interval for two closing points is 

1 

7.81 

= 128ms . Need at least 3 points (during 

time 2 × 128 = 256ms 

) if want the analysis diagram to display multiple-angle sharp. 

256 

Under this requirement, the parameter setting value is = 71 (586IPC). If this 

3.6 

parameter setting value is zero, this means not to enable the +ive X axis spike 

compensation function. 

3. Parameter 0814: Reversal Spikes Delay Time of +ive X axis 

Unit: discounting time interval 






Description: Assumed the circular spike occurring point of +ive X axis is not in the 

direction changing center (on the X axis), but it occurs after direction changing. Then, 

need to set this parameter. Please refer to the description of parameter 0813 for the 

calculating method of this setting value. 



Dimension 

8 Dimension 

The following is the dimension chart for each installation position. The linear part is the 

cutting line and the cycle part is the position of a drilling hole, and the dotted-line part is the 

range after the installation is completed. 

8.1 LCD Module Installation Position 

穿孔 



Dimension 

8.2 MDI Dimension 

Drill a hole 



Dimension 

8.3 Operational Panel Dimension 



Dimension 

8.4 Push-button Operational Panel Dimension 

To set up, use M4 screw with nut to lock up, the length is depend on the location. (OP 

panel is 5mm in depth) 

8 



Dimension 

8.5 MPG Operational Panel Dimension 

To set up, use M4 screw with nut to lock up, the length is depend on the location. (OP 

panel is 5mm in depth) 



Dimension 

8.6 FDD、CD-ROM Dimension 



Dimension 

8.7 ELC-1000MA Dimension 

PCC-1840 

MOTION 

ERR 

E5V 

VR1 

VR2 

R I/O 1 

BA 

R I/O2 

L I/O 

ELC-1000M-A 

USB 

COM1 

IDE 

PS2 

VGA 

FLOPPY 

DC Power 

+12 G +5 

COM2 

PRINT 

CF CARD 



Dimension 

8.8 ELC-2000 Dimension 

PCC-1840 

MOTION 

R I/O2 

ERR 

E5V 

VR1 

VR2 

L I/O 

R I/O1 

BA 

COM2 

ELC-2000 

COM1 

FAN ERR 

IDE 

PS2 RESET 

PRINT 

VGA 

FLOPPY 

DC Power 

+12V G +5V 

USB 

+5V 

CF CARD 



Dimension 

8.9 Standard (IPC 586) Dimension 



Dimension 

8.10 ELC_P100A Power Supply Dimension 



APPENDIX A: PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT EXAMPLE 


A1 Parameter Adjustment of V Command Control Method 

Using X axis as an example, the following is the diagram of CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM 

when motor ENCODER has the position feedback signal. 

NC 

Motor 

K p 

DAC 

Motor 

RPM/V 

Speed 

Loop 

Current 

Counter 

1/S 

Pulse/rotation of motor 

pulse V rpm rpm rev pulse 

1. K p :position gain on PCC1620 motion control card, P control. 

2. PCC1620 motion control board DAC specification: 

16-bit,output ±10V DAC analogy degree = 

10 

− 1 

2 −1 

16 

= 

10 

32767 

3. Motor incremental gain = 1V, the corresponding motor rotational speed rpm, is decided 

by motor specification(motor driver also needs to be set). 

4. The speed of motor driver and the responding speed of the current feedback is much 

faster than the speed of position feedback, so it is able to set it as 1. 

5. Total pulse per rotation of Motor = total Encoder output pulse per rotation of motor * 

multiple feedback factor. 




Example:X axis selects motor 2000rpm/10V, the total encoder output pulse per rotation of 

motor is 2500; for machine structure, gear ratio is 4; pitch is 10mm. Under V 

command control method, if users hope the system feedback loop gain is 30 

for this axis, then how to set the related parameters 

Answer: Parameter #0001:30(system feedback loop gain). 

Parameter # 0054:4(X axis multiple feedback factor). 

Parameter #1112:2500(total encoder output pulse per rotation of X axis motor). 

Parameter # 0108:200(X axis motor loop gain). 

Parameter #0156:3(X axis control commanding mode). 

Parameter #0068:1(denominator of X axis motor). 

Parameter #0100:4(numerator of X axis ball screw). 

Parameter #0104:10000(pitch of X axis ball screw). 

So the control loop at this time is as below: 

NC 

Motor 

Speed, Current Loop 

X 

Y 

Interpolation 

4 

K p 10/32767 

200 1 1/60 1/S 10000 

μm 

CMR 

puls 

e 

V 

rpm 

rpm 

rps 

rev 

pulse 

Relationship between Position Control Feedback Output and Input: 

Y 

1 

K 

p 

⋅10 

1 

32767 

⋅ 200⋅ 

60 

⋅ ⋅10000 

S 

10.17284K 

p 

= X = 

X , 

1 

1+ 

K 10 

1 

S 10.17284K 

p 

p 

⋅ ⋅ 200⋅ 

⋅ ⋅10000 

+ 

32767 60 S 

At this time, the position feedback loop gain is 10.17284K p . Since the user requires the 

30 

desired position loop gain is 30, so the K p value needs to be set as = 2.949 i on 

10.17284 

motion control board. 




Testing Method: 

F 

e = 

K 

,e is the following error under stable condition(X axis reaches equal speed), 

please check system data # 000, unit is the smallest unit of the system; F is the feedrate; 

K is the position feedback loop gain. In this example, when K is 30 and under the condition 

2000000 

that feedrate is 2000mm/min, following error should be e = 60 = 1111 when X axis 

30 

is in equal speed. When X axis is already in equal speed and the value of system data 

#000 is 1111 (or close to this number, sometimes there will be some difference due to 

moving forward one space), it means the parameter setting is correct. 




A2 Parameter Adjustment when Encoder is installed besides Ball Screw 

1. Connecting ball screw encoder feedback signal to NC, using it as position control. 

2. Connecting motor encoder feedback signal to motor driver, using it as speed 

(velocity) and voltage control. 

NC 

Motor 

Ballscrew 

Speed 

DAC Motor 

Interpolation CMR K p 

1/GR 

Loop 

RPM/V Current 

1/S 

Pulse/screw 

um 

pulse 

V 

rpm 

motor rpm 

ball screw rpm 

rev 

pulse 

3. Since the position feedback signal is returning back from ball screw at this time, 

must set gear ratio to 1 even there is gear ratio is between motor and ball screw. 

Putting the gear ratio factor into the position control feedback. 

4. Assumed the initial parameter # 1112 is to set the encoder total output pulse value 

per rotation of motor. At this time, changing it to as the encoder total output pulse 

value per rotation of ball screw. 

Example:X axis selects 2000rpm/10V motor,encoder total output pulse 

value per rotation of motor is 2500; for machine structure, gear ratio is 4, pitch 

is 10mm, Please to install an additional 3000pulses/rev encoder on the ball 

screw side and also to connect the feedback signal to NC for position control. 

Under the condition that V command control method and the system loop gain 

is 30, how to set the related parameters 

Answer:Parameter #0001:30(system feedback loop gain). 

Parameter #0054:4(X axis multiple feedback factor). 

Parameter #1112:3000(encoder total output pulse value per rotation of X axis 

ball screw). 

Parameter #0108:(X axis motor loop gain) 




Parameter #0104:10000(Pitch of X axis ball screw). 

explain later. 




3000*4 

CMR = = 1.2 pulses / um ,which means 1um on X axis is correspond to 1.2 

10000 

pulses that is the encoder total output signal of ball screw. 

Control Loop is as below: 

X 

NC 

Motor 

Ballscrew 

Interpolatio 1.2 K p 10/32767 200 1 1/4 1/60 

1/S 

12000 

Y 

um 

pulse 

V 

rpm 

Motor rpm 


Ball 

screw 

rps 

rev 

pulse 

But, since there is no extra parameters for GR factor setting in position feedback, 

modification is as following: 

X 

NC 

Motor 

Ballscrew 

Interpolatio 1.2 

K p 

10/32767 200/4 1 

1/60 

1/S 12000 

Y 

um 

pulse 

V 

rpm 

rpm 

rps 

rev 

pulse 

Input and Output Relationship: 

K 

p 

⋅10 

32767⋅ 

200⋅1 

4⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅12000 

Y = 

X 

1+ 

K ⋅10 

32767⋅ 

200⋅1 

4⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅12000 

K 

p 

⋅10 

32767⋅ 

200 4⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅12000 

3.05185K 

p 

= 

X = 

1+ 

K ⋅10 

32767⋅ 

200 4⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅12000 

S + 3.05185K 

p 

p 

p 

X 

So, in this application example, parameter #0108 setting value is 200/4=50 and the 

K p setting value is 

30 

3.05185 

= 9.83 on PCC1620 motion control board. 




Weakness: under the present structure, when the motor actual loop 

gain cannot be completely divided by gear wheel ratio, please enter the 

closest integrate value. Also, there is a little bit difference between the 

whole position loop gain values and Parameter #0001 value. But, the 

position control has no problem at all. 

Strength: able to clear backlash error. 




A3 Parameter Adjustment when using Linear Scale Control Method 

1. Connecting linear scale feedback signal to NC, using it as position control. 

2. Connecting motor encoder feedback signal to motor driver, using it as velocity 

(speed) and voltage control. 

NC 

Motor 

Ballscrew 

Speed 

DAC Motor 

Interpolatio CMR K p 

1/GR 

Loop 

RPM/V Current 

1/S Pitch 

Pause of Linear 

Scale Unit 

um 

pulse 

V 

rpm 

motor rpm 


rev 

um 

pulse 

3. Since the position feedback signal is returning back from table at this time, must 

set the gear ratio to 1 even there is gear ratio between motor and ball screw. 

Putting the gear ratio factor into the position control loop. 

Example:X axis selects 2000rpm/10V motor, the total 

encoder output pulse value per rotation of motor is 2500; for the 

machine structure, gear ratio is 4, pitch is 10mm. Also, please install an addition 

linear scale: every 20um will output one A/B pulse set, every 50mm will output one 

Z phase pulse and also sending the feedback signal to NC. Under the condition of V 

command control method and the system loop gain value is 30, how to set the 

related parameters 

Answer:Parameter #0001:30(system loop gain). 

Parameter #0054:4(X axis multiple feedback factor). 

Parameter #1112:(total encoder output pulse value per rotation of X axis 

motor). 


Parameter #0108:(X axis motor loop gain). 




Parameter #0104:(X axis pitch). 



(Parameter #1112 * Parameter #0054)the initial definition is the total 

encoder output pulse value per rotation of X axis motor. This value is 




used as the distance between each index in zero return procedure. So 

after changing to linear scale, Parameter #1112 also needs to change to 

the pulse value that is sent out by linear scale. In this example, every 

50 mm linear scale will produce one Z phase pulse, every 20 um will 

produce one A/B pulse set, so the pulse value that is produced by linear 

scale between each index is 50 * 1000 / 20 = 2500 

Parameter #1112 is 2500. 

the setting value of 

For linear scale, every 20 um will produce one A/B pulse set. This means every 5um 

will produce one pulse after 4 ratio so the CMR = 1 / 5 = 0.2. But for NC, 

P0058× 

P0054 

P100 

CMR = 

× 

P0104 

P68 

Since Parameter #1112 is to set the pulse value, which is produced by linear scale, 

between each index, Parameter #0104 must set the distance between each linear 

scale index in order to make the CMR in NC the same as that in linear scale. In this 

example, Parameter #0104 must be set as 50000. 

Control Loop is as following: 

NC 

Motor 

Ballscrew 

Interpolatio 0.2 K p 10/32767 200 1 1/4 1/60 1/S 1000 2500*4/50000 

um 

pulse 

V 

rpm 

motor rpm 

ball 

screw 

rpm 

ball screw rps 

rev 

um 

pulse 

Since there is no extra parameter for pitch and numerator of X axis ball screw setting, 

the control loop is modified as following: 

NC 

Motor 

Ballscrew 

Interpolatio 0.2 K p 10/32767 200*10000/(4*50000) 1 

1/60 

1/S 1000 

0 

Output and Input Relationship: 




K 

p 

⋅10 

32767⋅ 

200⋅1 

4⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅10000⋅10000 

50000 

Y = 

X 

1+ 

K ⋅10 

32767⋅ 

200⋅1 

4⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅10000⋅10000 

50000 

K 

p 

⋅10 

32767⋅(200⋅10000) 

(4⋅50000) 

⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅10000 

= 

X 

1+ 

K ⋅10 

32767 ⋅(200⋅10000) 

(4⋅500000) 

⋅1 

60⋅1 

S ⋅10000 

p 

p 

0.50864 

= 

S + 0.50864K 

p 

X 

So, in this application case, the setting value of Parameter 0108 is 200*10000/(4*50000) 

=10. The K p setting value is 

30 

0.50864 

= 58.9808 on PCC1620 Motion Control Board. 

Weakness: Under current structure, when Parameter 0108 

cannot be an integrate number, please enter the closest integrate 

number. At this time, there will be some difference between the whole 

position loop gain and parameter 0001, but the position control will not 

have any problem. 

Strength: able to clear backlash error and pitch error. 



Appendix B: Servo Connection Example 


B1 Yaskawa Servo Connection Example 

YASKAWA Servo Motor Machine Adjustment Description 

Parameter Description Value Note 

Pn000 Control Mode Select: 

_ _1_ 

0:speed control 

1 

1:position control 

Pn100 Speed circuit gain Depend on motor type 

Pn101 Speed Loop Integral Time Constant Depend on motor type 

Pn102 Position Loop Gain Depend on motor type 

Pn200 Pulse Type 4 _ _ _4 

Pn201 PG Dividing Ratio Depend on motor type 

Pn202 Electronic Gear Ratio (Numerator) Depend on motor type 

Pn203 Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator) Depend on motor type 




YASKAWA Σ-II Series electron gear ratio formula 

NC output pulse/rev→ 

CMX(Pn202) 

CDV(Pn203) 

→driver pulse/rev 

feedack 

Encoder output pulses(Pn201x4) 

Model example 

SGMPH-01 A A A 2 S 

SGMPH-01 A A A G 1 2 B 

Code 

ENCODER pulse per rotate(pulse/rev) 

A 13-BIT 2048 

1 or B 16-BIT 16384 

2 or C 17-BIT 32768 

Ex: using motor that Code=A, PITCH=5MM, (1μ=1pulse): 

5MM=5000μ=5000pulse 

Because Pn201X4=5000 pulse 

So Pn201=1250 

NC parameter:to set X-Axis and Z-Axis ENCODER(P/Rev.)=1250。 

Pn203 

= 

Pn203 1250 

2048 

13−BIT 

X4 

x4 multiplier 

NC Para.: X−Axis 

/ Z−Zxis 

ENCODER ( P / Re v.) 

Servo motor parameter: 

Pn201:1250 Pn202:1024 Pn203:625 

X4 

x4 multiplier 

reduce 1024 

= ⎯⎯⎯→ 

625 

Ex: using motor that Code=1 or B, PITCH=10MM,(1μ=1pulse): 

10MM=10000μ=10000pulse 

Because Pn201< motor ENCODER PULES per rotate >X4< NC multiple >=10000 pulse 

So Pn201=2500 

NC parameter :X-Axis and Z-Axis ENCODER(P/Rev.)=2500 

Pn203 

= 

Pn203 2500 

16384 

16−BIT 

X4 

x4 multiplier 


/ Z−Zxis 


X4 

x4 multiplier 

Servo motor parameter: X-Axis and Z-Axis ENCODER(P/Rev.)=2500 

Pn201:2500 Pn202:4096 Pn203:625 

reduce 4096 

= ⎯⎯⎯→ 

625 




Ex:using Code=2 or C type motor, PITCH=10MM,(1μ=1pulse): 

10MM=10000μ=10000pulse 

Pn201 < motor ENCODER P/Rev. > X4 =10000 pulse 

So Pn201=2500 

NC para. : : X-Axis and Z-Axis ENCODER(P/Rev.)=2500 

Pn203 

= 

Pn203 2500 

32768 

17− 

BIT 

X4 

x4 multiplier 


/ Z−Zxis 


Servo motor parameters: 

Pn201:2500 Pn202:8192 Pn203:625 

X4 

( x4 multiplier) 

約分後 8192 

= ⎯⎯⎯ 

→ 

625 

ENCODER-Connection Diagram 




U23.1 

X 軸 

M2 

MOTOR-Connection Diagram#1 




MOTOR-Connection Diagram#2 




LNC 600S 

P1 Connection Diagram 




B2 Panasonic Servo Connection Example 

Panasonic Servo Motor Adjust Parameters 

A TYPE 

Para. Description Value Note 

Pr 02 * To set control mode 

0 

Control mode:0: position 

1: speed 

Pr10 Position Loop Gain According to motor 

type 

Pr11 Speed Loop Gain According to motor 

type 

Pr12 Loop Integral Time Constant According to motor 

type 

Pr40 * Control pulse multiple 4(default) Use if resolution been 

changed 

Pr44 * Number of output pulse per 

rotation 

2500(default) Use if resolution been 

changed 

Pr46 electronic gear ratio numerator 10000(default) Use if resolution been 

changed 

Pr4A electronic gear ratio numerator×2 n 0(default) Use if resolution been 

changed 

Pr4B electronic gear ratio denominator 10000(default) Use if resolution been 

changed 

D TYPE 

Para. Description Value Note 

Pr 02 * To set control mode 

0 

Control mode:0: position 

1: speed 

Pr03 Speed Loop Gain According to motor type 

Pr04 Loop Integral Time Constant According to motor type 

Pr20 Position Loop Gain According to motor type 




Panasonic electron gear ratio formula 

NC output pulse/rev→ 

Pr4A 

CMX(Pr46) × 2 →driver pulse/rev 

CDV(Pr4B) 

feedback 

Encoder output pulses(Pr44xPr40) 

NC pulse output must equal to driver feedback pulse(ENR) formula: 

Pr 44 × 

Pr 40 × 

Pr 46 × 2 

Pr 4B 

Pr40=4(default) 



Pr4A=0(default) 

Pr4B=10000(default) 

Ex: if want resolution of motor up to 10000pulse/rev 

2500 Pr 44 

× 4 

( Pr 40) 

10000 

× 

10000 

Pr 4A 

0( Pr 4 A) 

( Pr 46) × 2 

( Pr 4B) 

= 10000 pulse / 

rev 




P1 

25AWG*10P ***CM 

CNI/F 

LNC 600 

TRF 1720 P1-P4 

P1 

DES PIN NO. 

1A 11 

/1A 24 

1B 12 

/1B 25 

1C 10 

/1C 23 

/P1B 1 

P1B 2 

/P1A 14 

P1A 15 

SVI_CM 20 

AGND 5 

DACO1 17 

+24V 18 

FGND 4 

SERON 6 

ALM 19 

SVI_CM 8 

SERSET 9 

PANASONIC 

MDMXXX 

CN1A 

DES PIN NO. 

OA+ 21 

OA- 22 

OB+ 48 

OB- 49 

OZ+ 23 

OZ- 24 

SIGN2 6 

SIGN1 5 

PULSE2 4 

PULSE1 3 

COM- 41 

GND 15 

SPR/TRQR 14 

COM+ 7 

GND 25 

SRV-ON 29 

ALM+ 37 

ALM- 36 

A-CLR 31 

FG 

13 

FG 

50 





B3 Mitsubishi Servo Example 

Mitsubishi Servo Motor Adjust Parameter 

classification Para. # Symbol Name and function Default Setting 

value 

Basic 

parameter 

Extended 

parameter 1 

19 *BLK Parameter write 

function setting: 

0 *STY Control mode selection: 

0:position control 

2:speed control 

Please refer to 5-5 

Control 

Unit 

mode 

0000 000E P.S.T 

0000 0000 P.S.T 

2 ATU Auto-tuning: 

0105 0405 P.S 

Please refer to 5-6 

3 CMX electronic gear ratio 1 8192 P 

numerator 

4 CDV electronic gear ratio 1 625 P 

denominator 

21 *OP Function 3(command 0000 0012 P 

pulse selection) 

25 VCM Max. Feedback Speed 0 3000 Rpm/min S.T 

of Analogy Speed: 

Setting Analogy Speed 

Command(VC). Key-in 

the feedback speed of 

maximum voltage 

(10V). 

The setting value is 0 

as the constant 

rotational speed. 

27 *ENC Checking Output 

PLUSE: 

Output PLUSE = 

Analogy Degree/REV 

of Servo Motor 

Please also refer to 

Section 5-15. 

4000 10000 Pulse/rev P.S.T 

29 VCO Analogy Speed Accordi Millivolt 

Command OFFSET: ng to 

Setting Voltage servo 

OFFSET value of driver 

Analogy Speed 

Command(VC). 

37 VG2 Speed Incremental 2 817 1000 Rad/s 

Adjusting effort is more 

obvious than that of 

Speed Incremental 1. 

Mitsubishi electron gear ratio formula 


Ex: Setting ENCODER output value(NO.27)to 10000: 



CMX 

CDV 

Commandpulse numerator 

Commandpulse denominator 

131072X4 

Reduction 8192 

= = ⎯⎯ ⎯⎯→ 

= 

10000X4 

625 

parameter3 

parameter4 




3M 

10320 

* CN2 

L31.1 

25AWG*5P ***CM 

* ENC 

MR-J2S-XXA 

ENC 

DES 

P5 

LG 

P5 

LG 

P5 

LG 

MR 

MRR 

MD 

MDR 

BAT 

LG 

PIN NO. 

19 

11 

20 

12 

18 

2 

7 

17 

6 

16 

9 

1 

FG 

DES 

MR 

MRR 

LG 

FG 

MOTOR 

HC-SFS, RFS, UFS 

ENC 

PIN NO. 

S 

R 

C 

D 

A 

B 

F 

G 

N 

M 

ENCODER Connection Diagram 




* MO 

L27.1 

3.5mm*4C ***CM 

* MO 

MOTOR 

HC-SFS, RFS, UFS 

U* 

V* 

W* 

PE 

DES 

U* 

V* 

W* 

E 

B1 

B2 

MOTOR 

PIN NO. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

MOTOR Connection Diagram #1 




U23.1 

L21 

L22 

L23 

L1 

L2 

L3 

U 

V 

W 

U2 

V2 

W2 

M 

3 

1.0KW 220VAC 

X 軸 

M2 

PE 

PE 

PE 

PE 

L11 

L1C 

CN2 

L12 

L2C 

CN1A 

PA 

P5 

LG 

MR 

MRR 

LG 

S 

R 

C 

D 

G 

PG 

/PA 

FG 

N 

PB 

/PB 

PC 

/PC 

CN1B 

SIGN 

LG 

/SIGN 

VG 

PULSE 

COM 

/PULSE 

LSP 

COM 

LSN 

SON 

EMG 

ALM 

SG 

MOTOR Connection Diagram #2 




P1 

25AWG*10P ***CM 

CN1A 


TRF 1720 

P1 

25AWG*10P ***CM 

CN1B 

J2S-XXA 

P1 

DES PIN NO. 

1A 11 

/1A 24 

1B 12 

/1B 25 

1C 10 

/1C 23 

/P1B 1 

P1B 2 

/P1A 14 

P1A 15 

DES 

LA 

LAR 

LB 

LBR 

LZ 

LZR 

NG 

NP 

PG 

PP 

COM 

CN1A 

PIN NO. 

6 

16 

7 

17 

5 

15 

12 

2 

13 

3 

9 

FG 

+24V 

AGND 

DACO1 

GND 

GND 

SON 

GND 

ALM 

FG 

18 

5 

17 

4 

7 

6 

21 

19 

13 

CN1B 

DES PIN NO. 

COM 13 

VDD 3 

LG 1 

VG 2 

LSP 16 

LSN 17 

SON 5 

EMG 15 

ALM 18 

SG 10 

FG 





B4 TOSHIBA converter 

Starting & AUTO – TUNING Steps: 

Please Follow the below Parameter Adjustment Steps after Power ON: 

1.Para. vL:Base frequency #1(25 ~ 400 ) 

(Normal setting value is 60). 

2.Para. F306:Voltage of base frequency(output voltage adjustment) 

(Normal setting value is 0 ~ 600V). 

3.Para.F411:Nμmber of poles of motor(2、4、6、8、10、12、14、16、18) 


4.Para.F412:Rated capacity of motor( 0.1 ~ 280kw) 

Setting value is according to Output ratio on motor brand. 

5.Para.F413:Motor type( 0 ~ 4) 


6. Executing auto-tuning. 

Para.F400:To set auto-tuning selection as 2(auto-tuning enabled) 

7. When auto-tunning is finish, inverter will auto-save the new parameter after testing. 

Para.F401 ~ F410 auto-setting value. 

8.Finish Steps 1~7 and doing CW/CCW testing. 

Para.Fr(Forward/Reverse selection) 0:Forward 1:Reverse 

(This parameter is effective on OP operation method. ) 

9. To set Para.cnod(operation command mode selection)to 1. 




When AUTO – TUNING is finish and basic motor parameter data is key-in, executing 

parameter adjustment immediately. 

There are 24 basic parameters. F100 ~ F800 are extension parameters. 

Bais Parameter Setting: 

Parameter Function Setting Range 

AU1 

Automatic 

acceleration / 

deceleration 

0:disabled(manual setting) 

1:enabled(automatic setting) 

Setting 

Value 

This parameter controls ACC/DECELERATION Speed 

AU1=1: Auto acc/deceleration speed adjustment. But, user must set a constant value 

for the acceleration/deceleration parameter. This parameter will do 1/8 ~ 8 time 

auto-adjusting setting according to the acc/deceleration value. 

AU1=0:This function is disable which means that acc/deceleration is controlled by this 

parameter value. 

Figure 1 and Figure 2 are automatically time changing figure when overloading size 

changes. The below two figures show that this parameter can control the actual 

rotational speed in order to prevent any unusual sound. 

0 

Acc/Deceleration Time when Small 

Overloading 

Acc/Deceleration Time when Large 

Overloading 

Time 

Time 

Accleration 

Time 

Deceleration 

Time 

Acceleration 

Time 

Deceleration 

Time 

Figure 1 Figure 2 




Parameter Function Setting Range Setting Value 

AU2 Automatic V/f 0:( 0 is always displayed) 

1 

mode setting 1:Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning 

2 : Vector control ( speed control ) + 

auto-tuning 

3:Automatic energy-saving + auto-tuning 

When this parameter is finished setting, number will all be zero on the screen. Please do NOT 

worry whether or not the setting is finish. 

1:Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning 

The load current is observed in all speed range and the inverter's output voltage is adjusted 

automatically so that the motor can always produce torque large enough for stable operation. 

This parameter is finished setting, PE(motor control mode select) parameter will be set to 2 

automtaically(automatic torque boost). Also 400(auto tuning) parameter will be set to 2 

automatically(automatic torque execution). 

2:Vector control(speed control)+ auto-tuning 

The motor reach its full potential and produce large torque even at low speeds. Also, you can 

minimize motor speed fluctuations caused by load fluctuations for more accurate operation. 

This mode of control is best suited to conveyor and crane/hoist application as operated in speed 

control mode 

This parameter is finished setting, PE(motor control mode select)parameter will be set to 3 

automatically(vector control)Also 400(auto tuning) parameter will be set to 2 automatically 

(automatic torque execution). 

3:Automatic energy-saving + auto-tuning 

The inverter passes a current commensurate with the load to save energy. 

This parameter is finished setting, PE(motor control mode select)parameter will be set to 5 

automatically(vector control). Also 400(auto tuning) parameter will be set to 2 automatically 

(automatic torque execution). 

The correspoindng parameter value after AU1 is set. 

AU2 

Parameters set automatically 

PE 

F400 

0 0 is always display -- ----------- --------- 

1 Automatic torque boost 2 Automatic torque boost Executed 2 first 

+ auto-tuning 

( returns to 0 after 

execution) 

2 Vector control(speed) 

+ auto-tuning 

3 Automatic energy-saving 

+ auto-tuning 

3 Sensor-less vector control 

(speed control) 

5 Automatic energy-saving 

+ sensor-less auto-tuning 

Executed 2 first 


execution) 

Executed 2 first 


execution) 


3 

Setting 

Value 




CNOD Operation 0:Terminal input enable 

0 

command mode 1:Operating panel input enabled 

selection 2:Communication common serial option enabled 

3:Communication RS485 option enabled 

4:Communic add-on option enabled 

0:Terminal input enable 

Start and stop is exercised by means of external signals. 

1:Operating panel input enabled 

Start and stop is exercised by pressing the RUN or STOP key on the control panel. 

2:Communication common serial option enabled 

Start and stop is exercised from RS232C device fitted as standard. 

3:Communication RS485 option enabled 

Start and stop is exercised from RS485 communication device fitted as standard. 

4:Communic add-on option enabled 

Start and stop is exercised from add-on module communication option. 


FNOD 

Speed setting 

mode selection 

Setting 

Value 

1:VI( voltage input ) / II( current input ) 2 

VI:0 to 10Vdc II:4 to 20mAdc 

2:RR( Potentiometer / voltage input ) 

RR:0 to 10Vdc 

3:RX( voltage input ) 

RX:0 to +/-10Vdc 

4:RX2( voltage input ) 

RX2:0 to +/-10Vdc 

5:Operating panel input enabled 

Frequencies are set by pressing the control 

panel key. 

6:Binary / BCD input 

speed command are entered from 12/16 bit 

binary input or BCD 

7:Communication common serial option(RS232C) 

8:Standard communication RS485 

9:Communication add-on module option enabled 

speed command are entered from network 

communication 

10:Up-down frequency 

by means of up-down frequency signals from the 

terminal 

11:Pulse input 

Setting 


Value 

FNSL FM Terminal meter selection 0 ~ 31 0 

FN FM Terminal meter ----- --- 

adjustment 

This parameter is not used this time. So, please ignore it. 





typ 

Standard setting 

mode selection 

1:50Hz standard setting 

2:60Hz standard setting 

3:Factory default setting 

4:Trip history clear 

5:Comulative operation time clear 

6:Type information clear 

7:User setting storage 

8:Reset to saved parameters (7) 

Setting 

Value 


Setting 

Value 

Fr Forward / reverse run 0:Forward run 1:Reverse run 0 

selection 

This parameter is effective when CNOD is 1. 

In hardware wiring of F-CC: Forward running. R-CC Wiring: Reverse running. Please also refer 

to parameter F105. 


ACC Acceleration time 1 0.1(Note) ~ 6000 seconds Recommending 

Value = 15 

DEC Deceleration time 1 0.1(Note) ~ 6000 seconds Recommending 

Value = 15 

(Note) If the setting time is very small, it can be set by Para. F508. The range is 0.01 ~ 

10 sec. 

The ACC time is the frequency value of Output Speed Commanding, which is the time of 

frequency from 0 adding up to FH setting value. 

The DEC time is the frequency value of Output Speed Commanding, which is the time of 

frequency from FH decreasing down to 0 setting value. 

If two parameters are to set AU1 as 0, then it is manual adjustment parameter. Please refer 

to Figure 3 as a constant acceleration/deceleration frequency changes example. 

Acc/Deceleration are Constant No Matter Any Change 

FH 

Time 

Acceleration Time 

Deceleration Time 

Figure 3 


Setting 

Value 




FH Maximμm frequency 30 ~400 Hz 333 

Max. outuput frequency to control acc/deceleration time condition. 

Setting 


Value 

UL Upper limit frequency LL ~ FH 333 


LL Lower limit frequency 0 ~ UL 3 

Setting 

Value 

Setting 


Value 

uL Base frequency 25 ~ 400 60 

uL parameter is used in constant torque control area. Please refer to parameter F306 

(Base frequency voltage). 


Setting 

Value 

Pt Motor control 0: Constant torque characteristic(motor control) 9 

mode 

selection 

1: Square reduction torque characteristic (motor 

and so on.) 

2: Automatic torque boost (V/F control 

automatically). 

Must used as AU2 = 2 and F400 = 1. 

3: Sensor-less vector control. Must used as AU2 = 

4 and F400 = 2. 

4: Automtic torque boost + automatic energy-saving 

Must used as AU2 = 4 and F400 = 2. 

5: Sensor-less vector control + automatic 

energy-saving. Must used as AU2 = 4 and F400 = 

2. 

6:V-f 5-point setting 

7: Sensorless vector control ( torque/speed 

switching) 

8: PG feedback vector control ( torque/speed 

switching) 

9: PG feedback vector control ( torque/position 

switching) 


ub Manual torque boost 0 ~ 30% Depends on 

1 

capacity 




When torque produced in low speed range is not large enough, it can be boosted up by 

increasing the torque boost rate with this parameter 

This parameter can be used with: 

PE=0(V/f constant) 

PE=1(square reduction) 

PE=6(V/f 5-point setting) 

(Note)This value must not be too high. Everytime’s incremental can not be over2% of 

setting value, or over current will occur. 

Base-frequency F306 

ub 

7 

Output frequency(Hz) 




Parameter Function Setting Range Note 

Electronic thermal protective characteristic selection 

Set Value Overload Overload stall 

protection 

0 O × 

OLN O 1 Standard 

O O 

2 motor 

× × 

3 

× O 

4 O × 

5 VF motor 

O O 

6 (special 

× × 

7 

motor) 

× O 

Setting 

Parameter 

Function 

Setting Value 

Range 

Sr1 ~Sr7 Preset-speed operation frequencies 0 ~ 30% Depends on capacity 

This parameter can set 15 kinds of default speed. The first seven sections are set in S1 ~ 

S7 and the last eight sections are set in F287~F294. The requirements, such as 

acc/deceleration, direction and so on) can be modified in F380 ~ F394. Also, when doing 

multiple-speed testing, CNOD and FNOD must be modified in order for this function to be 

effective. Please refer E28 ~E30 for a detailed description. 

Please notice that this value is a frequency multiplier value, not actual rotational speed. 

Preset-speed 

Note 

Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

S1 - CC O -- O -- O -- O -- O -- O -- O -- O 

S2 - CC -- O O -- -- O O -- -- O O -- -- O O 

S3 - CC -- -- -- O O O O -- -- -- -- O O O O 

S4 - CC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- O O O O O O O O 




P7 

25AWG*10P 175CM 

P7 

TRF LNC 1720 600 

TOSHIBA VF-A7 

VEC001Z TB2 

P7 

DES 

EGND 

E5V 

4A 

/4A 

4B 

/4B 

4C 

/4C 

FG 

PIN NO. 

1 

5 

4 

8 

3 

7 

2 

6 

9 

PGCC 

PGVC 

A 

NA 

B 

NB 

Z 

NZ 

DES 

PGCC 

PGVC 

A 

NA 

B 

NB 

Z 

NZ 

TB2 

PIN NO. 

15 

14 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

ENCODER Connection Diagram 




PG 

25AWG*10P 175CM 

SP ENC 

TOSHIBA VF-A7 

VEC001Z CN8 

CN8 

DES 

PGA1 

PGA2 

PGB1 

PGB2 

PGZ1 

PGZ2 

NZ 

(N. C.) 

VD 

Z 

NA 

A 

NB 

B 

PGCC 

PGVC 

PIN NO. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

FG 

橙 

黃 

粉紅 

紅 

藍 

綠 

黑 

白 

DES 

NZ 

Z 

/A 

A 

/B 

B 

0V 

5V 

MOTOR 

ENCODE 

ENC 

PIN NO. 

8 

7 

4 

3 

6 

5 

2 

1 

MOTOR Connection Diagram 




MOTOR Connection Diagram 




SP AXIS 




P5 

25AWG*10P 175CM 

P5 


TRF 1720 

TOSHIBA VF-A7 

VEC001Z TB2 

P5 

DES 

/P4B 

P4B 

/P4A 

P4A 

PIN NO. 

9 

10 

22 

23 

CCWN 

CCW 

CWN 

CW 

DES 

CCWN 

CCW 

CWN 

CW 

TB1 

PIN NO. 

CCWN 

CCW 

CWN 

CW 

SPI_COM 11 

SPI_COM 24 

EGND 21 

SPCW 8 

SPCCW 20 

SPFRST 7 

AGND 5 

DACO5 17 

+24V 18 

SPALM 3 

FG 13 

ST 

CC 

CC 

F 

R 

RES 

CC 

RR 

FLC 

FLA 

DES 

ST 

CC 

CC 

F 

R 

RES 

CC 

RR 

FLC 

FLA 

FLB 

S4 

CC 

PIN NO. 

ST 

CC 

CC 

F 

R 

RES 

CC 

RR 

FLC 

FLA 

FLB 

S4 

CC 




Appendix C: Enabling OP Protection Loop Connection Example 

Appendix C: Enabling OP Protection Loop Connection 

Example 

Here assumed that users need to connect operation panel themselves due to the problem 

of Pou Yuen Technology’s operation panel does not meet their needs. The following 

describes how to connect the enable protection loop on Users Define Operation Panel with 

TRF1720. 



Appendix C: Enabling OP Protection Loop Connection Example 

TRF1720 

ON_OFF PORT 

第 4 軸 ENABLE 第 5 軸 ENABLE 

RELAY RELAY 

第 4 軸 ENABLE 

第 5 軸 ENABLE 



Appendix D: 3 In 1 MPG Connection Example 

Appendix D: 3 In 1 MPG Connection Example 

MPG 

橙白 , 黑白 

紫 

淡綠 

藍 

灰 

橙 

黃 

粉紅 

綠 

紅白 

紅黑 

棕 

紅 / 灰黑 

大綠 



Appendix E: RS232 Connection Description 


For remote transmittion connector standard, it means the remote transmittion connector 

and the external setting signal connection standard. RS-232C is the very easy transmittion 

standard. If not using hard-part flow control, only needs 3 signal cables in order to 

accomplish the double transmittion jobs. 

The electronic feature of RS232 belongs to the in-balance transmittion method. So the 

transmittion distance is a little bit short, approximate 15m, due to the anti-interference 

function is weak. According to the RS-232C standard, connector circuit must be the 

physical D type connector. D type connector has 25 cords (short name is DB25). But, it 

can be 9 cords (short name is DB9). Most of PC use DB9, like the diagram show below: 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

PIN Abb. Meaning 

Pin1 CD Carrier Detect 

Pin2 RXD Receive 

Pin3 TXD Transmit 

Pin4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 

Pin5 GND Ground 

Pin6 DSR Data Set Ready 

Pin7 RTS Request To Send 

Pin8 CTS Clear To Send 

Pin9 RI Ring Indicator 




• Transmitting Cable Production 

There are two types of Pin for a normal type remote port. One is 9 Pin and the other one is 

25 Pin. Usually the NC side has 9Pin male port. But, the PC side has either 9Pin or 25Pin. 

male port. 

The method to connect NC and PC is to do the transmitting via jumper cable. If users 

equipment is 9Pin, then please use the 9Pin connector. Actually, 9Pin is very useful for 

other controller system application. Sometimes, 3Pin can have the same control function. 

So the simplest 3Pin is to use the 2 nd , the 3 rd and the 5 th pins to receive and transmit. 

NC COM1(9 pin Female) 

to 

PC COM1(9 pin Female) 

NC PC 

----------------------------- 

pin2(RD) --- pin3(TD) 

pin3(TD) --- pin2(RD) 

pin5(SG) --- pin5(SG) 

NC COM1(9 pin Female) 

to 

PC COM2(25 pin Female) 

NC PC 

----------------------------- 

pin2(RD) --- pin3(TD) 

pin3(TD) --- pin2(RD) 

pin5(SG) --- pin7(SG) 



Appendix F Internet Setting Description 


Network Connection Settings for the Controller 

This controller can obtain the resource of a remote disk in Microsoft Network by “Internet 

Connection Sharing.” Below are the steps to be made at the controller side & PC side, 

respectively, to install and to make relative settings to enable network connection sharing 

function. 

1. At the controller side: 

Install network software at the controller side. To install, boot the system with an OS 

floppy disk and select the installation option 3 “INSTALL NETWORK UTILITIES.” (This 

step can be skipped if there is already a NET directory in the path of “C:\NET.”) 

Modify network configuration of the controller. There are two ways to make the 

modifications: by DOS or by the operating interface of LNC software. 

Method 1: By DOS 

A. Modify the file “C:\config.sys” of the controller. 

Modify 

REM device=C:\NET\ifshlp.sys 

into 

device=C:\NET\ifshlp.sys 

B. Edit “C:\Net\2net.bat.” Modify this line according to your needs: 

C:\NET\net△use△N:△\\PCNET\share△12345△YES 

Below are the definitions for each field in the line. 

a. △ represents a blank character. 

b. ”PCNET” is the computer name in the Network, and “share” is the folder name shared by the 

computer. 

c. ”N” is the (virtual) disk of N: which is mapping to the sharing resource “\\PCNET\share“ in the 

network. (Please do not use “D:” which is used for different purposes; using “D:” will cause 

errors.) 

d. “12345” indicates the password to log on PC. Passwords may or may not be required for 

different operating systems. 

u Window98:For this system, instead of adding a new account, users can connect some 

network disk by sharing a folder with each other. Therefore, users must log on with the 

same password as set by PC for “folder-sharing” function. 




u Window2000 & WindowXP:The two systems have higher security levels for access 

permissions, so users of different identifications are required to enter different passwords 

as set by PC. If no password is set at PC side, network connection would fail unless PC 

permission is open for guest access (the setup of guest access is described in the later 

chapter). 

u For OS versions Ver.2.5 or versions earlier than Ver.2.5, some disk codes that are no 

longer applicable can still be shown. If this occurs when the controller is on-line, add the 

line C:\NET\net stop /yes before the line C:\NET\ net initialize. 

C. Verify if the settings are correct for the controller’s file C:\NET\SYSTEM.INI and 

also for other relative settings in Network Neighborhood. Some programs might 

need to be modified as below (Please DO NOT change the settings that are not 

mentioned here): 

[network] 

: 

computername=LNCDOS 

: 

username=LNCDOS 

: 

workgroup=WORKGROUP 

: 

logondomain=WORKGROUP 

: 

a. ”computername=” is the controller name in the Network. Each controller should have its own 

unique name that is different from other disks in the Network. The default computer name is 

LNCDOS. Therefore, if there is more than one controller in a domain, this default name must be 

modified. 

b. ”username=” is the controller name to log on PC. Except for Window98, all other operating 

systems require PC side to add a new user with the same name at the same time unless 

access permission is open to guests. The default user name is LNCDOS. Since a user can use 

the same name to log on repeatedly, there is no need to modify this name even if there is more 

than one controller in a domain. 

c. ”workgroup=” is the work group name of the controller when logging on the internet. Please set 

this value according to the Network which the controller belongs to. By default, it is set as 

“WORKGROUP.” 

d. ”logondomain=” is the domain name of the controller when logging on the internet. Please set 

this value according to the domain that the controller belongs to. The setting method is 

basically the same as that of “WORKGROUP.” 




Method 2. By the operating interface of LNC software 

A. For 600 & 520 Series, the path to go to the configuration interface is 

NET SET; for 500i/510i & 300i/310i Series, it is < PARAM > NET, as shown in 

the figures below. 

Networking configuration screen for 600 & 520 Series 

Networking configuration screen for 500i/510i & 300i/310i Series 




B. FIELD DEFINITIONS: 

a. NC NAME: “computername” in the C:\Net\system.ini file. One name should not be used 

twice in the same domain. The default name is LNCDOS. 

b. USERNAME: “username” in the C:\Net\system.ini file. This is the user to log on PC. The 

default name is LNCDOS. 

c. GROUP: “workgroup” in the C:\Net\system.ini file. This is the work group name of the 

controller when logging on the internet. The default name is WORKGROUP. 

d. STATUS(for 600 & 520 Series) or STAT (for 500i/510i & 300i/310i Series): 

u Disk codes are used in C:\Net\2net.bat when logging on the internet. 

u Disk codes start from “E” to “N.” There are 10 codes in total. 

u The drive codes are assigned by the system; users are not allowed to set the codes by 

themselves. 

u ○ & X after drive codes indicate the network status of the drive. X means off-line; ○ 

means on-line. 

u Disk codes other than E ~ N existing before network setting is configured will be deleted 

after networking configuration is finished. 

e. PC NAME: Enter the full computer name for the controller to get connected with PC. The 

maximum length allowed is 12 characters. 

f. SHARE DIR: Enter the share folder name for the controller to get connected with PC. The 


g. PWD.: Set the password to get connected with PC. The content of the password is visible when 

being entered, but it will be converted into “******” as soon as “Enter” key is pressed. The 


C. DEFINITIONS OF FUNCTION KEYS 

a. Press the keys UP, DOWN, LEFT, & RIGHT to move cursor to the desired field. 

b. Enter the information in the input text box, then press INPUT to upload the information to the 

field assigned by cursor. 

c. Pressing INPUT without any information in the input text box will delete the original information 

in the field. 

d. Press PageUp & PageDown to switch between pages. 

e. SAVE: Press SAVE to save changes. 

f. RECON: Press emergency button then press RECON, the changes will be validated. 

※ Due to connectivity issues, sometimes the controller fails to log on the network. 

If this happens when the above functions are in use, the controller will try to 

connect to the same disk for 3 times before connecting to the next disk. After all 

connections are tried, the controller will then enter the system. 




2. NETWORK SETTINGS AT PC SIDE 

Network Settings for Windows 98 

A. Verify if the network card, internet cables, and relative protocols have been 

installed properly. 

Verify if the “NetBEUI” protocol & the “File and printer sharing for Microsoft 

Networks” service have been installed. (Caution: DO NOT activate the network 

protocol “NWlink NetBIOS” which would cause network connection to fail.) 

a. Click Start Settings Control Panel. 




b. Double-click on the Network icon to configure network settings. 




c. If the two network protocols “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” & “NetBEUI” are 

not installed, please press Add. 




d. If “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” is not installed, please select Service; if 

“NetBEUI” protocol is not installed, please select Protocol. Then click Add. 

e. If “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” is not installed, highlight it on the service 

menu then click OK to complete installation. 




f. If the network protocol “NetBEUI” is not installed, please highlight it on the menu as shown in 

the diagram below then click OK to complete installation. 

B. Verify if Computer Name & Workgroup are set correctly. 

(The setting of workgroup and logondomain in C:\net\system.ini must be the 

same as those at PC side. The computername in C:\net\2net.bat must be the 

same as PC’s computer name.) 

a. Select Start Settings Control Panel. 

b. Double-click on the Network icon. 

c. Verify if the settings of Computer Name & Workgroup are the same as those in 

C:\NET\2net.bat & C:\NET\system.ini. (Take the diagram below as an example, 

computername of 2net.bat should be set to “tenwho”;workgroup of system.ini should be 

set to “Workgroup”). 




C. Share a directory at PC side 

a. Go to Windows Explorer and create a new folder with the name “tmp” (The folder can be 

named differently by users). 




b. Left-click to select the “tmp” folder, then right-click and choose Sharing. 




c. Please follow the steps below for configuration: 

u Click the Sharing tab. 

u By default, the Share Name and the newly-created folder are the same. 

u Users can change name of the new folder, but it must be the same as the folder name in 

2net.bat. 

u Verify the box of Full for Access Type. 

u You can choose either to set a password or not. If set, the password must be the same as 

that in 2net.bat. 




3. NETWORK SETTING FOR WINDOWS 2000 

A. Verify if a network card, internet cables, and the relative protocols have been 


Verify if the “NetBEUI” protocol & the “File and printer sharing for Microsoft 


protocol “Nwlink NetBIOS” which would cause network connection to fail.) 

a. Select Start Settings Control Panel. 




b. Double-click on the Network and Dial-up Connections icon. 




c. Right-click on the Local Area Connection icon and left-click properties. 




d. If the two network protocols “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” & “NetBEUI 

Protocol” are not installed, verify the boxes and press Install to install them. 




e. If “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft NetWorks” is not installed, please select Service; if 

“NetBEUI Protocol” is not installed, please select Protocol. Then click Add. 




f. If “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” is not installed, highlight it on the menu then 

click OK to complete the installation. 

g. If “NetBEUI Protocol” is not installed, highlight it on the menu then click OK to complete the 

installation. 




B. Verify if “computername” & “workgroup” are set correctly. 

(The setting of workgroup and logondomain in C:\net\system.ini must be the 



a. Right-click on “My Computer” icon on the desktop then left-click properties. 

b. Select the Network Identification tab. Verify if the settings of Full computer name & 

Workgroup are the same as those in C:\NET\2net.bat & C:\NET\system.ini. (Take the 

diagram below as an example, computername of 2net.bat should be set to “mark-nb”; 

workgroup of system.ini should be set to “WORKGROUP”). Press Properties to change 

Full computer name & Workgroup. 




c. To change a computer or workgroup name, modify it directly in the corresponding text box. 





a. Press Start Run, enter “explorer,” and press OK to open explorer. 

b. Create a new folder for sharing. 




c. Left-click the new folder, and then right-click Sharing. 




d. Click the Sharing tab, click to select Share this folder, and verify if the name in the Share 

name text box is the same as that in the 2net.bat file. Then click Permissions. 




e. Select “Everyone” in the Share Permissions section, and check all the Allow boxes in the 

Permissions section. Then press OK. 




D. ENABLE USER ACCESS: 

There are two ways to enable user access. Please choose either one according to 

your need. The advantage of method 1 (recommended) is its convenience for 

installation, and there is no need to add a new user if each controller has its own 

username; however, the disadvantage is that its security level is low. On the 

contrary, the second method has a higher security level. But if there are different 

user names for different controllers, users are required to add a new user each 

time. Depending on the types of operating systems, there are different steps for 

setup as listed below: 

Method 1: 

a. Right -click the My Computer icon on the desktop, and Left-click Manage. 

b. In the Manage pop-up menu, in the Users folder, left-click Guest, right-click,and then left -click 

“Set Password.” 




c. Leave the password boxes blank, and press OK. 

d. Press OK again, and finish the procedure of password modification. 




e. If there is a red cross over the Guest icon in the Users folder, right-click on Guest and select 

Properties. A dialogue box will appear as the figure below, check the boxes of “User cannot 

change password” & “Password never expires” and uncheck the box of “Account is disabled.” 




f. Next, set a higher access level for Guest. To do so, click Start Run, and enter secpol.msc 

in the text box. Then press OK. 

g. Click Local Policies User Rights Assignment. Right-click the Access this computer from the 

network method, and then left-click Security. 




h. Click the Add button. 




i. After Add is clicked, a new dialog box will appear as the figure below. Click Guests, click Add, 

and press OK. Then the procedure to enable guest access is finished. 




Method 2: 

a. Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop, and Left-click Manage. 

b. Right-click the User folder, and left-click New User. 




c. A dialog box will appear as the figure below. Please enter the username same as that in the 

system.ini file, and enter the password same as that in the 2net.bat file. Check the boxes 

as the figure shown below, and then press Create to finish the procedure of enabling user 

access. 




4. Network Settings for Windows XP Professional 

A. Verify if a network card, internet cables, and the relative protocols have been 


Verify if the “NetBEUI Protocol” & the “File and printer sharing for Microsoft 


protocol “NWlink NetBIOS” which would cause network connection to fail.) 

a. Because Microsoft does not support the network protocol “NetBIOS” (NetBEUI) in Windows XP, 

users must install the network protocol NetBEUI additionally from the Windows XP CD. Please 

follow the steps below for installation: 

u Insert the Windows XP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Browse the 

Valueadd\MSFT\Net\NetBEUI folder. 

u Copy Nbf.sys to the directory %SYSTEMROOT%\System32\Drivers. 

u Copy Netnbf.inf to the hidden directory %SYSTEMROOT%\Inf. 

u Note: To make the hidden directory visible, execute the following steps: 

b. Click Start, click Run, enter “explorer” in the text box, and then press ENTER. 

c. Click Tools, click Folder Options, then click the View tab. 

d. Under Advanced Settings, and under Hidden files and folders, click Show hidden files and 

folders. 

u Note: %SYSTEMROOT% is a Windows environment variable for discerning the directory 

installed in Windows XP (Ex. C:\Windows). If users want to view the relative values of 

%SYSTEMROOT% or other environment variables, please enter “set” in the Command 

Prompt window, then press “ENTER.” 




e. Click Start Control Panel. 

f. Double-click Network Connections. 




g. Right -click the Local Connection icon, then left-click properties. 




h. If the two network protocols “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” & “NetBEUI 

Protocol” are not installed, please press Install for installation. 




i. If “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” is not installed, please select Service; if 

“NetBEUI Protocol” is not installed, please select Protocol. Then click Add. 




j. If “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” is not installed, highlight it on the service 

menu then click OK to complete installation. 




k. If the “NetBEUI Protocol” is not installed, please highlight it on the menu as shown in the 

diagram below then click OK to complete the installation. To validate the configuration, please 

reboot the system. 




B. Verify if Computer name & Workgroup are set correctly. 

(The settings of workgroup & logondomain in C:\net\system.ini must be the 



a. Click Start Control Panel. 

b. Double-click System. 




c. Select the Computer Name tab, and verify if the settings of Full computer name & 

Workgroup are the same as those in C:\NET\2net.bat & C:\NET\system.ini at the 

controller side. (Take the figure below for example, computername of 2net.bat must be set to 

“uichain1,” and workgroup of system.ini must be set to “WORKGROUP.” If you need to 

change the computer name or workgroup name, click Change to modify it. 




d. To modify the computer name or workgroup name, make the revision directly in the 

corresponding text box. 





a. Click Start Run, enter “explorer” in the text box, and then press OK. 

b. In Windows Explorer, select File New Folder. Name the new folder after the 

corresponding folder at the controller side such as share, pcscan, and so on. 




c. Uncheck Use simple file sharing mode. In Windows Explorer, select Tools Folder Options, 

click the View tab, and uncheck the box of Use simple file sharing. 




d. Right-click the new folder, and left-click Sharing and Security. 




e. Click the Sharing tab, check the box of Share this folder, and verify if the name in the Share 

name text box is the same as that in the 2net.bat file. Then click [Permissions]. 




f. Select “Everyone” as Group or user names, and check all the Allow boxes in the Permissions 

for Everyone section. 




g. If there is no Security tab in the dialog box, the steps for folder sharing is then finished. If there 

is, please click the Security tab, and the following figure is shown: 




h. Click the Add button, and the Select users or Groups dialog box will appear as the figure 

below: 




i. Click the Advanced button, and the following dialog box will be shown: 




j. Press the Find Now button, and a list of users will appear in the bottom section of the dialog as 

shown below: 

k. Click to select in the list the user that needs to be added. There are two ways to do this: 

Method 1:Open permissions to Everyone by selecting Everyone in the menu. 

Method 2:Add the user “lncdos” as assigned by〝username=lncdos〞in the 

c:\net\system.ini file. The username may not be “lncdos;” for 

its setting, please refer to the setting in system.ini. 







l. Take the example of adding the new user “lncdos,” after clicking to select the new user in the 

list, press OK, and the following figure will be shown: 




m. Press OK again, and the following dialog box will appear. Please check the box of Full Control, 

and then press OK to complete the procedure of adding a new folder. 

D. ENABLE USER ACCESS: 

There are two ways to enable user access. Please choose either one according to 

your need. The advantage of method 1 (recommended) is its convenience for 

configuration, and there is no need to add a new user for controllers with different 

usernames; however, it has the disadvantage of a low security level. On the 

contrary, the second method has a higher security level. But if there are multiple 

controllers with different names, users are required to add a new user for each 

controller separately. Depending on the types of operating systems, there are 

different steps for setup as listed below: 




Method 1: 

a. Press Start My Computer Manage. 




b. Click to select the folder Local Users and Group Users, Right-click Guest, and then 

left-click Set Password. 




c. The following dialog box will appear, press the Proceed button to close the dialog box. 

d. Leave the password boxes blank, and press OK. 




e. Press OK again to finish password modification. 




f. If there is a red cross over the Guest icon in the Users folder, right-click on Guest and select 

Properties. A dialogue box will appear as the figure below, check the boxes of User cannot 

change password & Password never expires and uncheck the box Account is disabled. 




g. Next, set a higher access level for Guest. To do so, click Start Run, and enter secpol.msc 

in the text box. Then press OK. 




h. Click Local Policies User Rights Assignment, right-click the Deny logon locally policy, 

and then left-click properties. 




i. Left-click Guest, and press the Remove button. After the access permission for Guest is open, 

press OK to close the dialog box. 




j. Right -click the Access this computer from the network policy, left-click properties. 




k. Click the Object Types button. 

l. Check the box of Groups, and then press OK. 




m. Press the Advanced button, press the Find Now button, and a list of users will be shown in the 

bottom section of the dialog box. Select Guests in the list, and press OK to complete the 

procedure of enabling guest access. 




Method 2: 

a. Click Start My Computer Manage. 

b. Right-click the Users folder, and left-click New User. 




c. A dialog box will appear as the figure below. Please enter the username same as that in the 

system.ini file, and enter the password same as that in the 2net.bat file. Verify the boxes 

as the figure shown below, and then press Create to finish the procedure of enabling guess 

access. 

5. Network Settings for Windows XP HOME Edition 

A. Verify if the network card, internet cables, and relative protocols have been 


For this section, please refer to the above setting procedure of Windows XP 

Professional. 

B. Verify if Computer name and Workgroup have been set correctly. 

For this section, please refer to the above setting procedure of Windows XP 

Professional. 




C. Share a directory at PC side. 

a. Click Start Run, enter “explorer” in the text box, and then press OK. 

b. In Windows Explorer, select File New Folder. Name the new folder after the 

corresponding folder at the controller side such as share, pcscan, and so on. 




c. Right-click the new folder, and left-click Sharing and Security. 

d. Click the Sharing tab, and verify the boxes of Share this folder on the network & Allow 

network users to change my files. Check that the name in the Share name text box is the 

same as that in the 2net.bat file, and then press OK to complete the procedure of 

file-sharing. 







6. NETWORK WIRING: STEPS TO WIRE A CONNECTOR WITH CABLE 

Network cable from controller to HUB: 

Internal network wiring 

PC side 

Controller side 

This is the conductor side 


White/Orange 

Orange 

White/Green 

Blue 

White/Blue 

Green 

White/Brown 

Brown 

White/Orange 

Orange 

White/Green 

Blue 

White/Blue 

Green 

White/Brown 

Brown 

Network cable from the controller to PC 

One to one network wiring 

PC side 

Controller side 



White/Orange 

Orange 

White/Green 

Blue 

White/Blue 

Green 

White/Brown 

Brown 

White/Green 

Green 

White/Orange 

Blue 

White/Blue 

Orange 

White/Brown 

Brown 




7. DISCONNECTION & IDLE TIME-OUT SETTINGS 

There are two possible causes for users to experience a disconnection problem for 

“over idle time-out limit” when sharing a folder with network disks on-line: 

A. Operating system: For the operating system at PC side that is Windows 2000 or 

Windows XP, by default, the idle time-out limit is set to 15 minutes. 

B. Network card: PC side automatically shuts down the power of network cards. This 

usually happens for laptop users. 

Below are the procedures to disable idle time-out limit. 

• OPERATING SYSTEMS 

For Windows 2000: 

a. Click Start Run, enter “gpedit.msc” in the text box, and press OK to open the Group Policy 

configuration dialog box. 




b. Set the policy Amount of idle time required before disconnecting session in Computer 

Configuration\ Windows Settings\ Security Settings\ Local Policies\ Security Options. 




c. Double-click on the principle, and a dialog box will appear as the figure below. Enter “0” in the 

text box, which means no disconnection at all time. To validate the configuration, please reboot 

the system. 




For Windows XP: 

a. Click Start Run, enter “gpedit.msc” in the text box, and press OK to open the Group Policy 

configuration dialog box. 

b. Set the policy Miscrosoft network server: Amount of idle time required before suspending 

session in Computer Configuration\ Windows Settings\ Security Settings\ Local Policies\ 

Security Options. 

c. Double-click on the principle, and a dialog box will appear as the figure below. Enter “0” in the 

text box, which means no disconnection at all time. To validate the configuration, please reboot 

the system. 




• NETWORK CARD 

For Windows 2000: 

d. Click My Network Places Right-click properties Local Area Connection Right-click 

properties Click the Configure button of General tab Click the Power Management tab, 

and uncheck the box of Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power as the 

figure below: 




For Windows XP: 

a. Click My Network Places Right-click properties Local Area Connection Right-click 

properties Click the Configure button of General tab Click the Power Management tab, 

and uncheck the box of Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power as the 

figure below: 




VIRUS SCAN BY A NETWORK DRIVE 

If the controller is infected with a virus, enter the system and scan for virus. If the virus 

cannot be removed, you can try to scan the virus by a network drive. The setting 

procedure is as below: 

1. Follow the installation method of the virus scan program to install the program in the 

C:\PCSCAN directory at PC side. Or, double-click the PCSCAN.EXE file in the directory 

of network settings to decompress and move the files automatically to the C:\PCSCAN 

directory. 

2. Please set access permission of the PCSCAN file to “read-only.” 




3. Make an emergency boot disk. 

A. Insert a disk into the PC drive. 

B. Double-click the program NRC1.0.exe. 

C. “1.0” of NRC1.0.exe indicates the version of the program. 

4. Modify the following contents in the boot disk: 

A. A:\NET\SYSTEM.INI 

B. The shared file PCSCAN in A:\NET\2NET.BAT. 

For example A:\net\net use u: \\uichain1\pcscan /yes 

For further details, please refer to Appendix D “Networking Settings.” 

5. After the boot disk has been reconfigured and set to “read-only,” insert the disk into the 

controller drive and reboot the system. Please change the system configuration to boot 

off by a disk; in so doing, the controller will connect to network disks at the same time 

as entering the system. 

6. During initial connection, because the disk is set to “read-only” and the network drive 

cannot write to the disk, the message “Write protect error writing drive A, Abort, Retry, 

Fail” will appear. When this occurs, please press “f” to discharge the message and 

continue to connect to the network. 

7. When the connection is successful, switch manually to the pcscan directory. For the 

above example, switch to U disk (U:\\pcscan). 

8. Execute pcscan.exe. 




COMMON PROBLEMS OF NETWORK DISKS 

Common network errors at the controller side: 

u Error 5: Access has been denied. 

Definition: Access has been denied. 

Troubleshooting: 

a. Verify if there is any new username in the system.ini file at PC side; and also 

verify if guest access of the file is enabled. 

b. Verify if the file names at PC side and in the 2net.bat file are the same. 

u Error 52: Duplicate workgroup or computer name exists on the network. 

Definition: Duplicate workgroup or computer name exists on the network. 

Troubleshooting: Change the computer name of the controller; meaning, change 

“computername” in the system.ini file. 

u Error 53: The computer name specified in the network path cannot be located. 

Definition: The specified computer name does not exist or is not open for access. 


a. Verify if the network connection light of network cable has turn on. 

b. Verify if the NetBEUI Protocol has been installed. 

c. Verify if the contents of computername and workgroup are the same as those in 2net.bat & 

system.ini at the controller side. 

d. Reboot the system with the emergency boot disk to connect to a network disk and scan the 

system by using the connected disk. 

u Error 55: This resource does not exist on the network. 

Definition: The share file does not exist, or the share file at the controller side does not 

have authority to access. 


a. Verify if the file names at PC side and in the 2net.bat file at the controller side are the same. 

b. Verify if the file at PC side is open for access, and the access method is set to full control. 

c. Verify if the user password at PC side has expired. To verify, reset the user password and check 

the box of Password never expires. Then reconnect to see if the connection works. 




u Error 58: The network has responded incorrectly. 

Definition: Incorrect response of the network. 


a. Verify if the user password at PC side has expired. 

b. Verify if the user password at PC side is the same as that in the 2net.bat file at the controller 

side. 

u Error 67: The specified shared directory cannot be found. 

Definition: The specified share directory cannot be found. 


a. Verify if the file of PC side has the permission for file sharing. 

b. Verify if the file names at PC side and in the 2net.bat file are the same. 

u Error 85: The local device name is already in use. 

Definition: The local device name is already in use. 

Troubleshooting: Verify if there is any duplicate disk code in the 2net.bat file at the 

controller side. 

u Error 2184: The service has not been started. 

This error message can be ignored. 

u Error 3658: The IFSHLP.SYS driver is not installed. 

Definition: The IFSHLP.SYS driver is not installed. 

Troubleshooting: Verify if “rem” of rem device=C:\NET\ifshlp.sys in the 

C:\config.sys file has been deleted.

LNC-M600 Leading Numerical Controller Maintenance Manual

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?